2007 chevrolet colorado owner manual m · 2007 chevrolet colorado owner manual m 1. ... “general...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 17Safety Belts ............................................ 20Child Restraints ...................................... 44Airbag System ........................................ 77Restraint System Check ......................... 96

Features and Controls ................................ 99Keys ..................................................... 101Doors and Locks .................................. 106Windows ............................................... 112Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 115Starting and Operating Your

Vehicle .............................................. 118Mirrors .................................................. 141

OnStar® System ................................... 149Storage Areas ...................................... 153Sunroof ................................................ 156

Instrument Panel ....................................... 157Instrument Panel Overview ................... 160Climate Controls ................................... 177Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 181Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 198Audio System(s) ................................... 206

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 245Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 246Towing ................................................. 299

2007 Chevrolet Colorado Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 321Service ................................................. 324Fuel ...................................................... 326Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 331Rear Axle ............................................. 368Four-Wheel Drive .................................. 368Front Axle ............................................ 369Bulb Replacement ................................ 370Windshield Wiper Blade

Replacement ..................................... 375Tires ..................................................... 377Appearance Care .................................. 422

Vehicle Identification ............................. 432Electrical System .................................. 432Capacities and Specifications ................ 437

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 439Maintenance Schedule .......................... 440

Customer Assistance Information ............. 459Customer Assistance and Information ..... 460Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 475Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ..... 478

Index .......................................................... 481

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, andthe name COLORADO are registered trademarksof General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right to makechanges after that time without further notice. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited” for ChevroletMotor Division whenever it appears in this manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without afront passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there ifit is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicleis sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive theirnew vehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in the ownermanual to explain things.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15866155 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you wereto ignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazardis. Then we tell you what to do to help avoidor reduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shownalong with the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name ofa component, gage, or indicator, referencethe following topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Power Seats ............................................... 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10Power Lumbar ............................................. 11Heated Seats .............................................. 11Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15Seatback Latches ........................................ 16

Rear Seats .................................................... 17Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) .......... 17Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ................ 18

Safety Belts .................................................. 20Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 20Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 25How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 26Driver Position ............................................. 26Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 34Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 35

Right Front Passenger Position ................... 35Center Front Passenger Position ................. 36Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 37Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 40Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 43Safety Belt Extender ................................... 43

Child Restraints ............................................ 44Older Children ............................................. 44Infants and Young Children ......................... 46Child Restraint Systems .............................. 50Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 54Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 56Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 69Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ....................... 71Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 72

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 77Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 80When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 83What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 85How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 85What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 86Passenger Sensing System ......................... 88

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 94Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 95Restraint System Check ............................... 96

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 96Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 96

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to make sure the seat is locked into place.

9

Power Seats

If the vehicle has powerseats, the controls usedto operate them arelocated on the outboardside of the seats.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe horizontal control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the horizontalcontrol up or down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire horizontal control up or down.

• Use the vertical control to recline the seatback.See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” underReclining Seatbacks on page 12 for moreinformation.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle hasthis feature, there isa knob located onthe outboard sideof the driver’s seat.

Turn the top of the knob toward the front of thevehicle to increase lumbar support. Turn thetop of the knob toward the rear of the vehicle todecrease lumbar support.

10

Power Lumbar

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the control islocated on the outboardside of the seat(s).

Press and hold the front of the control until youhave the desired lumbar support. To decreaselumbar support, press and hold the rear ofthe control.

Heated Seats

If your vehicle hasthis feature, thecontrols are locatedon the outboard sideof the front seats.

This feature will heat the cushion and back ofthe seats.Press the top of the switch to turn the heat tothe high setting. Press the bottom of the switchto turn the heat to the low setting. Put the switchin the center position to turn the heat off.The ignition must be on for the heated seatfeature to work. The seat will heat to the lastsetting if the ignition has been turned off andthen turned back on.The passenger’s safety belt must be fastened for theheated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.

11

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle ifyou try to adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull onthe seatback to be sure it is locked.

If your seats have manual reclining seatbacks,the lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seat(s).

12

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to makesure it is locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position,do the following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Power Reclining Seatbacks

If the seats have powerreclining seatbacks,use the vertical powerseat control locatedon the outboard sideof the seat.

• To recline the seatback, press the controltoward the rear of the vehicle.

• To raise the seatback, press the controltoward the front of the vehicle.

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you arereclined like this.

CAUTION: (Continued)


The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receivingneck or other injuries.

The lap belt cannot do its job either.In a crash, the belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when the vehicleis in motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicleis moving.

14

Head RestraintsYour front seats may have adjustable headrestraints. If your vehicle has rear seats, theymay have adjustable head restraints.

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull up on the headrestraint to raise it.To lower the headrestraint, pressthe button located ontop of the seatbackand push down onthe head restraint.

15

Seatback LatchesYour vehicle may have front seatbacks that foldforward for easy access to the rear seats orthe storage area behind the seats.

To fold the seatbackforward, push the leveron the side of theseat rearward and pullthe seatback forward.

{CAUTION:


To return the seatback to the upright position,push the seatback all the way back until it latches.If the seatback was reclined before being foldedforward, it will return to the reclined position.

16

Rear Seats

Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)

If your vehicle hasan extended cab,there may be forwardfolding seats in therear area.

To fold the rear seat cushion(s) from the storedposition to the sitting position, pull the front ofthe seat cushion down completely.

The rear seat storage compartments must beclosed before folding the seat down. SeeRear Storage Area on page 154.

To store the seat, do the following:Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

1. Secure the safety belt buckle to the inboard sideof the seat with the hook and loop fastener (A),so that it does not move when not in use.

2. Push the entire seat up until it is flush with thetrim panel.

17

Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)The rear seatback(s) in the crew cab can befolded forward.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To fold the rear seatback(s) forward, do thefollowing:

1. Disconnect the rear center safety belt latchfrom the mini buckle by inserting the tip ofthe safety belt tongue into the slot onthe buckle. Let the belt retract.

18

2. Pull the loop,located on theoutboard side ofthe seatback,forward until youhear a click.

3. Fold the seatback(s) forward.To return the seatback(s) to the upright position,do the following:1. Lift the seatback(s) and push it into place.

{CAUTION:


2. Make sure the seatback(s) is locked bypushing and pulling on it.

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed,not properly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure thatthe safety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

3. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate tothe mini buckle. Make sure the safety belt isnot twisted. Push and pull on the latch plate tobe sure it is secure.

When the seatback is not in use, it should be keptin the upright, locked position.

19

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.This includes riding on the tailgate, evenwhen the vehicle is operated at lowspeeds. In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. People riding on thetailgate can easily lose their balance andfall in response to vehicle maneuvers.Falling from a moving vehicle may resultin serious injuries or death.

Do not allow people to ride in, or on, anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seatand using a safety belt properly.

20

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seatand using a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 184and Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Lighton page 184.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will bea bad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes canbe so serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

21

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

Put someone on it.

22

Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

23

or the instrument panel... or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

24

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drivefar from home, why should I wearsafety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speedsof less than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

25

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 44 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 46. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt.Here is how to wear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the beltacross you. Do not let it get twisted.

26

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure itis secure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 43.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster tothe height that is right for you. Impropershoulder belt height adjustment could reducethe effectiveness of the safety belt in acrash. See Shoulder Belt Height Adjustmenton page 34.

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

27

The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slideunder the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen.

This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

28

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

29


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

30


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

31


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.It should be worn over the shoulder atall times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

32


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

33

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way. Whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate upthe safety belt webbing. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, nearthe guide loop on the side wall.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt isout of the way. If you slam the door on it, youcan damage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of thebelt is centered on your shoulder. The belt shouldbe away from your face and neck, but not fallingoff your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce the effectiveness of thesafety belt in a crash.

To move it up or down,squeeze the releasebuttons (A) together,or pull them towardyou, and movethe height adjuster tothe desired position.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without squeezing therelease buttons to make sure it has locked intoposition.

34

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding, throughoutthe pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 26.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature which may turn offthe passenger’s frontal airbag. If this happens, justlet the belt go back all the way and start again.

35

Center Front Passenger Position

Lap BeltIf your vehicle has a 60/40 split front seat,someone can sit in the center position.

When you sit in the center front seating position,you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate andpull it along the belt.

To make the belt shorter, pull its free end asshown until the belt is snug.

Buckle, position and release it the same wayas the lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the beltis not long enough, see Safety Belt Extenderon page 43.

Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

36

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash.And they can strike others in the vehicle whoare wearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the beltacross you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

37

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back allthe way and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 43.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

The lap part of the belt should be worn lowand snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slideunder the lap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force at your abdomen.

38

This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.The shoulder belt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor a crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on thebuckle. For outboard seating positions, whenthe safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plateup the safety belt webbing. The latch plate shouldrest on the stitching on the safety belt, near theguide loop on the side wall.

39

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesYour vehicle may have rear shoulder beltcomfort guides for the rear outside positions.

Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

Here is how to install a comfort guide to theshoulder belt:

1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip locatedbetween the interior body and the seatback.

40

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt.The elastic cord must be under the belt.Then, place the guide over the belt andinsert the two edges of the belt into theslots of the guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

41

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection neededin a crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 37. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store a comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can take themout of the guide. Slide the guide back on itsstorage clip located between the interior bodyand the seatback.

42

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activatein a crash, you will need to get new ones,and probably other new parts for your safetybelt system. See Replacing Restraint SystemParts After a Crash on page 96.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. Whenyou go in to order it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will be long enoughfor you. To help avoid personal injury, do not letsomeone else use it, and use it only for the seatit is made to fit. The extender has been designedfor adults. Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt.For more information, see the instruction sheetthat comes with the extender.

43

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt shouldfit snugly below the hips, just touching the topof the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severeor even fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

44

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the centerof the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 40. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safetybelt buckle. In either case, be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the child’s upper bodywould have the restraint that belts provide.

45

{CAUTION:

Never do this.Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears the beltin this way, in a crash the child might slideunder the belt. The belt’s force would thenbe applied right on the child’s abdomen.That could cause serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neitherthe distance traveled nor the age and size ofthe traveler changes the need, for everyone, touse safety restraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age mustbe restrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

46

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, theyneed to use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesnot weigh much — until a crash. During acrash a baby will become so heavy it isnot possible to hold it. For example,in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly becomea 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’sarms. A baby should be secured in anappropriate restraint.

47

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or veryclose to, any airbag when it inflates canbe seriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

48

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so thecrash forces can be distributed across



the strongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants always shouldbe secured in appropriate infant restraints.

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed.A young child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

49

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

50

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

51

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat,or position children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint systemis a portable one, which is purchased bythe vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries,an add-on child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. With built-in or add-onchild restraints, the child has to be securedwithin the child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint,be sure the child restraint is designed tobe used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

Securing an Add-on Child Restraintin the Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 56for more information. A child can be endangeredin a crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle.

52

When securing an add-on child restraint, referto the instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

Securing the Child Within theChild RestraintThere are several systems for securing thechild within the child restraint. One system,the three-point harness, has straps that comedown over each of the infant’s shouldersand buckle together at the crotch. Thefive-point harness system has two shoulderstraps, two hip straps, and a crotch strap.A shield may take the place of hip straps.

A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that areattached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shieldhas straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-likeshield that swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it isimportant to refer to the instructions that comewith the restraint. A child can be endangeredin a crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint.

53

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat.

We recommend that children be secured in arear seat, including: an infant or a child ridingin a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child ridingin a booster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never puta rear-facing child seat in the front.” Thisis because the risk to the rear-facing childis so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, andno one can guarantee that an airbagwill not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


54


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seatas far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in a rear seat.

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat thatwill accommodate a rear-facing child restraint,we recommend that rear-facing child restraintsnot be transported in your vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killedby the right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in the center front seatposition. The restraints will not work properly.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraintcan move around in a collision or sudden stopand injure people in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint in yourvehicle — even when no child is in it.

55

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)

The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicleand attachments on the child restraint thatare made for use with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors orthe safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

56

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

57

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints alsohave a top tether. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.


j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

Extended Cab — RearSeat

58


For crew cab models, there are exposed metallower anchors for each rear outboard seatingposition, located where the seatback meetsthe back of the seat cushion.

For extended cab models with rear seats,there are exposed metal lower anchors foreach rear seating position, attached to theback wall, near the seat cushion.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors, placeyour hand in a palm-up position and reach upbetween the seat cushion and the seatback.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located onthe trim cover.

Front Seat — Regularand Extended Cabwithout Rear Seats

59

The top tether anchors in a crew cab model arelocated on the back wall behind each rear seatingposition. Be sure to use an anchor located onthe same side of the vehicle as the seatingposition where the child restraint will be placed.

The top tether anchors in an extended cab modelare located on the center of the back wallbehind a removable cover for the rear seatingpositions. Be sure to use an anchor locatednearest to the seating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Crew Cab Extended Cab — Rear Seat

60

For regular and extended cab models withoutrear seats, there is a top tether anchor locatedbehind a removable cover on the back wall behindthe right front passenger seat. You may have topull the seatback forward to access the anchor.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position of a vehicle that hasrear seats if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be attached, or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that thetop tether must be attached. There is no placeto attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restrainton page 54 for additional information.

Regular and Extended Cab without Rear Seats

61

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

62

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

63

Crew Cab — Rear Seat

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructionsrecommends that the top tether be attached,attach the top tether to the top tetheranchor (A). Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forward to accessthe top tether anchors (A). See RearSeat Operation (Extended Cab)on page 17 or Rear Seat Operation(Crew Cab) on page 18.

2.2. Route the top tether according toyour child restraint instructions andthe following instructions:

If the position youare using has a fixedhead restraint andyou are using asingle tether, routethe tether over thehead restraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a singletether, raise thehead restraint and routethe tether under thehead restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

64

If the position youare using has a fixedor adjustable headrestraint and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

2.3. Attach the top tether to the anchor (A).Make sure that you secure the toptether to the top tether anchor andnot to the seatback latch (B).

2.4. Push rearward on the seatback until itlocks into its upright position. Push andpull on the seatback to make sure itis secured properly.

3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

3.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

3.2. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the child restraint tothe lower anchors.

4. Tighten the top tether.

5. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

65

Extended Cab — Rear Seat

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors (D) for thedesired seating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach the lower attachments on the

child restraint to the lower anchors (D)in the vehicle. The child restraintinstructions will show you how.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attachand tighten the top tether to the top tetheranchor (C). Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Pull on the finger access tab to removethe cover to access the top tetheranchors (C).

66

2.2. Route the top tether (A) through theloop (B) at the top of the seatback toattach the top tether to the nearesttop tether anchor (C).

3. Tighten the lower anchor attachments andthe top tether. The child restraint instructionswill show you how.


Front Seat — Regular/Extended Cabwithout Rear SeatsYour vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag and a passenger sensing system.The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facingchild restraint or booster seat is detected.

See Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position on page 72 and PassengerSensing System on page 88 for importantsafety information and additional informationon installing a child restraint in the right frontseat position.

1. See Securing a Child Restraint in the RightFront Seat Position on page 72 for instructionson installing the child restraint using thesafety belts.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer’s instructionsrecommends that the top tether be attached,attach and tighten the top tether to the toptether anchor. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Pull the seatback forward to accessthe top tether anchor. See SeatbackLatches on page 16.

2.2. Pull on the finger access tab to removethe cover to access the top tetheranchor.

67

2.3. Route the top tether according to yourchild restraint instructions and thefollowing instructions:

If the position youare using has afixed head restraintand you are usinga single tether, routethe tether over thehead restraint.

If the position youare using has anadjustable head restraintand you are using asingle tether, raise thehead restraint androute the tether underthe head restraint andin between the headrestraint posts.

If the position youare using has afixed or adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether around thehead restraint.

3. Attach and tighten the top tether accordingto your child restraint instructions.


68

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 56.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructions that camewith the child restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and as the instructions say.


2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

69

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. If your child restraint has a top tether, attachthe top tether to the top tether anchor.See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 56.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

70

7. Tighten the top tether to the anchor.See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 56.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. Thesafety belt will move freely again and be ready towork for an adult or larger child passenger.For outboard seating positions, when the safetybelt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safetybelt webbing. The latch plate should rest on thestitching on the safety belt, near the upper anchoron the side wall.

Securing a Child Restraint in theCenter Front Seat Position

{CAUTION:

A child in a child restraint in the centerfront seat can be badly injured or killedby the right front passenger’s airbag if itinflates. Never secure a child restraint inthe center front seat. It is always better tosecure a child restraint in the rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in this position.

71

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’sairbag. A rear seat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 54.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facinginfant seat or a small child in a forward-facingchild restraint or booster seat is detected.See Passenger Sensing System on page 88 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 186for more information on this including importantsafety information.

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing childis so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing child restraintwould be very close to the inflating airbag.Even though the passenger sensing systemis designed to turn off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in therear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as far back as itwill go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

72

If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint, neverput a child in a rear-facing child restraint in the rightfront passenger seat unless the passenger airbagstatus indicator shows off and the airbag is off.Here is why:

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facingchild restraint, whenever possible.


If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)on page 56.

73

If your vehicle has rear seats, there is no toptether anchor at the right front seating position.Do not secure a child seat in this position ifa national or local law requires that the top tetherbe anchored or if the instructions that comewith the child restraint say that the top tether mustbe anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 56 if the childrestraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.

Secure the child in the child restraint when andas the instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 88. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured in arear seat, even if the airbag is off. If yourchild restraint is forward-facing, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe child restraint in this seat. See ManualSeats on page 9 or Power Seats on page 10.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passengerairbag status indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to ON or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 186.


3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

74

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. If your vehicle does not have rear seats andif your child restraint has a top tether, attachthe top tether to the top tether anchor.See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 56.

75

7. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not beable to pull more of the belt from theretractor once the lock has been set.

8. Tighten the top tether to the anchor.See Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 56.


10. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to ON or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.

76

If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle if one is available and check withyour dealer.

To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached, disconnect it. Unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way. Thesafety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger.When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the upper anchor on the side wall.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driverand a frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare available for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver and for theright front passenger and the passenger seateddirectly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the airbagcovering on the ceiling near the side windows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

77

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deployin moderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designedto inflate in rollover, rear crashes, orin many side crashes. And, for someunrestrained occupants, frontal airbagsmay provide less protection in frontalcrashes than more forceful airbagshave provided in the past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the sideof your vehicle. They are not designedto inflate in frontal, in rollover, or inrear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

78

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbagsplus lap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 44 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 46.

79

There is an airbagreadiness light onthe instrument panelcluster, which showsthe airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 185 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

80

The right front passenger’s airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seateddirectly behind the driver, it is located in theceiling above the side windows.

81

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it islocated in the ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupantand an airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbagmust be kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. If your vehiclehas side impact airbags, never secureanything to the roof of your vehicle byrouting the rope or tie down through anydoor or window opening. If you do, thepath of an inflating side impact airbagwill be blocked. The path of an inflatingairbag must be kept clear.

82

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which help the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderate frontalimpacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front ofyour vehicle goes straight into a wall that doesn’t

move or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 8 to 16 mph(12.9 to 25.7 km/h), and the threshold levelfor a full deployment is about 19 to 24 mph(30.6 to 38.6 km/h) if the other sensors do notover-ride this. The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that itcan be somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms,the airbags could inflate at a differentcrash speed than if the vehicle hits anobject that does not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight intothe object.

83

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

If your vehicle has side impact airbags, it haselectronic side sensors. The side impact airbagsare intended to inflate in moderate to severeside crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate ifthe crash severity is above the system’s designed“threshold level.” The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design. Side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontal or near-frontalimpacts, rollovers or rear impacts. Both sideimpact airbags will deploy when either side ofthe vehicle is struck.

Your vehicle has seat position sensors whichenable the sensing system to monitor the positionof the driver’s seat and the right front passenger’sseat. Seat position sensors provide informationthat is used to determine if the airbags shoulddeploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of whatthe repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflationis determined by what the vehicle hits, theangle of the impact, and how quickly the vehicleslows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts.For side impact airbags, inflation is determinedby the location and severity of the impact.

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.See Off-Road Driving on page 260 for more tipson off-road driving.

84

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers arelease of gas from the inflator, which inflatesthe airbag. The inflator, airbag, and relatedhardware are all part of the airbag modulesinside the steering wheel and in the instrumentpanel in front of the right front passenger.For vehicles with roof-mounted side impactairbags, there are also airbag modules in theceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contactthe steering wheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually.But the frontal airbags would not help you inmany types of collisions, including rollovers,rear impacts, and many side impacts, primarilybecause an occupant’s motion is not towardthe airbag. Side impact airbags would nothelp you in many types of collisions, includingmany frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers,and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, andthen only in moderate to severe frontal ornear-frontal collisions for the driver’s andright front passenger’s frontal airbags, andonly in moderate to severe side collisions forvehicles with side impact airbags.

85

What Will You See After anAirbag Inflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,so quickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impactairbags may still be at least partially inflatedminutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Somecomponents of the airbag module — the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbagor the ceiling of your vehicle near the sidewindows — may be hot for a short time. The partsof the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. Theremay be some smoke and dust coming from thevents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing outof the front windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it prevent people fromleaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

86

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors (if your vehicle has power doorlocks), turn the interior lamps on, flash the hazardwarning flashers, and turn off the radio when theairbag inflates. You can lock the doors again byusing the door lock. The interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers will deactivate after approximately15 minutes. You can use the radio controls toadjust the radio.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once.After an airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy on page 478 and Event DataRecorders on page 479.

• Let only qualified technicians work on yourairbag system. Improper service can meanthat your airbag system will not work properly.See your dealer/retailer for service.

87

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to ON or START. The wordsON and OFF or the symbol for on and off,will be visible during the system check.

When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF, or the symbol for on orthe symbol for off will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 186.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat and safety belt. The sensors are designedto detect the presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the passenger’s frontalairbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. We recommend that child restraintsbe secured in a rear seat, including an infantriding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child ridingin a forward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

United States Canada

88

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing childis so great if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be seriously injured or killed if theright front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would bevery close to the inflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,



no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


89


{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Be sure the airbag is offbefore using a rear-facing child restraintin the right front seat position.



Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints betransported in vehicles with a rear seatthat will accommodate a rear-facing childrestraint, whenever possible.


90

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weightoff of the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger’s frontal airbag has beenturned off by the passenger sensing system, theoff indicator on the instrument panel will lightand stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and theon indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstallthe child restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securinga Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 72.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle if one is available and check withyour dealer.

91

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in your vehicle who hasoutgrown child restraints should wear a safetybelt properly — whether or not there is anairbag for that person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the rightfront passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit,it could be because that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens, turnthe vehicle off and ask the person to place theseatback in the fully upright position, then situpright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion,with the person’s legs comfortably extended.

Restart the vehicle and have the person remainin this position for about two minutes. This willallow the system to detect that person and thenenable the passenger’s airbag.

92

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system.If this ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right front passenger’sseat may not have the protection of theairbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 185 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, canaffect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment if yourvehicle has the passenger sensing system.

See Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 95 for more information aboutmodifications that can affect how the systemoperates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

93

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag systemin several places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer/retailerand the service manual have information aboutservicing your vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 476.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probablypart of the airbag system. Be sure tofollow proper service procedures, andmake sure the person performing workfor you is qualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

94

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keepthe airbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors.If you have any questions about this,you should contact Customer Assistancebefore you modify your vehicle. The phonenumbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 460.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If youhave questions, call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers and addresses forCustomer Assistance are in Step Two ofthe Customer Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 460.

95

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 425for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering forthe driver’s or the right front passenger’sairbag, or the side impact airbag covering(if equipped) on the ceiling near the sidewindows, the airbag may not work properly.

You may have to replace the airbag modulein the steering wheel, both the airbag moduleand the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, or side impact airbagmodule and ceiling covering for roof-mountedside impact airbags (if equipped.) Do notopen or break the airbag coverings.

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

96

If you have had a crash, do you need new beltsor LATCH system parts?

After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replaceairbag system parts. See the part on the airbagsystem earlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt assemblies. Be sure to do so. Then thenew assemblies will be there to help protect youin a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,even if the frontal airbags have not deployed.The driver and front passenger’s safety beltassemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners.Have your safety belt pretensioners checked ifyour vehicle has been in a collision, or if yourairbag readiness light stays on after you startyour vehicle or while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 185.

97

✍ NOTES

98

Keys ............................................................ 101Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 102Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................. 103Doors and Locks ........................................ 106

Door Locks ................................................ 106Power Door Locks ..................................... 107Programmable Automatic

Door Locks ............................................ 108Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) ....... 108Lockout Protection ..................................... 109Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ...................... 109Tailgate ..................................................... 110

Windows ...................................................... 112Manual Windows ....................................... 112Power Windows ........................................ 113Sliding Rear Window ................................. 114Sun Visors ................................................ 115

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 115Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 115Passlock® .................................................. 117

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 118New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 118Ignition Positions ....................................... 119Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 121Starting the Engine .................................... 121Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 123Automatic Transmission Operation ............. 124Manual Transmission Operation ................. 126Four-Wheel Drive ...................................... 129Parking Brake ........................................... 133Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 135Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transmission) ....................... 137Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transmission) ........................... 137Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 138Engine Exhaust ......................................... 139Running the Engine While Parked ............. 140

Section 2 Features and Controls

99

Mirrors ......................................................... 141Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 141Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 142Automatic Dimming Rearview

Mirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature Display ....................... 142

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with Compass andTemperature Display .............................. 145

Outside Manual Mirrors ............................. 147Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 148Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 148

OnStar® System .......................................... 149Storage Areas ............................................. 153

Glove Box ................................................. 153Cupholder(s) .............................................. 153Front Armrest Storage Area ....................... 154Assist Handles .......................................... 154Rear Storage Area .................................... 154

Sunroof ....................................................... 156

Section 2 Features and Controls

100

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could bebadly injured or even killed. They couldoperate the power windows or othercontrols or even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with the keys inthe ignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path ofa closing window. Do not leave the keysin a vehicle with children.

101

There is a double-sidedkey that can be used forthe ignition, all doorlocks, and the tailgate.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer/retailerprovides the owner with a pair of identical keysand a key code number.

The key code number tells your dealer/retaileror a qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.Keep this number in a safe place. If you lose yourkeys, you will be able to have new ones madeeasily using this number. Your dealer/retailershould also have this number.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle callthe GM Roadside Assistance Center. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 466.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

102

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacementis necessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 103.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationIf your vehicle has this feature you can lockand unlock your doors and disarm or arm yourtheft-deterrent system from about 3 feet (1 m) up to30 feet (9 m) away using the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 115 for additional information.

UNLOCK: Press thisbutton to unlock thedriver’s door and turnon the interior lamps.The parking lamps mayalso flash, and thehorn may chirp, whenthis button is pressed.

Press the unlock button again within threeseconds and all of the doors will unlock.

LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors.The parking lamps may also flash and thehorn may chirp when this button is pressed.

103

If a door is open or ajar when the lock buttonis pressed, the horn will chirp several times to letyou know the doors did not lock and the contenttheft-deterrent system is not armed. Pressingthe lock button again while the horn is chirpingor within three seconds after the horn stopssounding, the doors will lock but the contenttheft-deterrent system will not arm until theopened door is closed.

You can program different feedback modesthrough the Driver Information Center (DIC).To program the feedback modes, see “RemoteKeyless Entry Feedback” under DIC Controlsand Displays on page 198.

L (Panic): Press this button to make the hornsound and the headlamps and taillamps flashfor up to 30 seconds. To turn them off again, doone of these three things: wait for 30 seconds;press the panic button again; or start the vehicle.

Matching Transmitter(s) toYour VehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to preventanother transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacementcan be purchased through your dealer/retailer.Remember to bring any remaining transmitterswith you when you go to your dealer/retailer.When the dealer/retailer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourdealer/retailer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock yourvehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximumof four transmitters matched to it.

104

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about two years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, usecare not to touch any of the circuitry.Static from your body transferred to thesesurfaces may damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slotbetween the covers of the transmitter housing.Gently pry the transmitter apart.

2. Remove and replace the battery with athree-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery.

3. Align the covers and snap them together.

4. Check the operation of the transmitter.

105

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children,

can easily open the doors and fall outof a moving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crashif the doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.



• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow down orstop your vehicle. Locking your doorscan help prevent this from happening.

There are several ways to lock and unlockyour vehicle.

To lock or unlock the door from the outside,use the key in the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor or press the lock or unlock button onthe remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter.

106

To lock a door from the inside, push themanual lever on the door forward. To unlocka door from the inside, push the lever on thedoor rearward.

You will see a colored area on the lever whenthe door is unlocked.

Power Door LocksIf your vehicle haspower door locks,the switches arelocated on thedriver’s and thefront passenger’sarmrests.

Press L (lock) to lock all the doors at once.To unlock all the doors, press U (unlock).

On crew cab models, use the manual door locklever on each rear door to lock or unlock thedoors from the rear seating areas.

Driver’s Switch Shown,Front Passenger’s

Switch Similar

107

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksIf your vehicle has power door locks and theremote keyless entry system, it has an automaticlock/unlock feature.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission,it is programmed from the factory to lock all doorsautomatically when the shift lever is moved outof PARK (P). All the doors will unlock whenthe shift lever is moved back into PARK (P).

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, it isprogrammed from the factory to lock all thedoors when the vehicle speed is greater than15 mph (24 km/h). The doors will unlock whenthe key is removed from the ignition.

To change the automatic door lock and unlocksettings, see “Automatic Door Locks” underDIC Controls and Displays on page 198.

Rear Door Security Locks(Crew Cab)If your vehicle is a crew cab model, it may haverear door security locks. With this feature, you canlock the rear doors so they cannot be openedfrom the inside.

The rear door securitylock is located onthe inside edge of eachrear door below thesecurity lock label.

108

To engage the security locks, do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock tothe horizontal position.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.

If you want to open a rear door when the securitylock is on, unlock the door and open the doorfrom the outside.

To disengage the security locks, do the following:

1. Open one of the rear doors.

2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock to thevertical position.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat these steps on the other rear door.

Lockout ProtectionIf you have power door locks, this feature protectsyou from locking your key in the vehicle whenthe key is in the ignition and a door is open.

If the power door lock switch is pressed whena door is open and the key is in the ignition,all of the doors will lock and then the driver’sdoor will unlock.

Rear Doors (Extended Cab)To open a rear door, open the front door.Then, use the handle located on the front edgeof the rear door panel to open it. You must closethe rear door before closing the front door.

109

Tailgate

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride on thetailgate, even when the vehicle is operatedat low speeds. People riding on thetailgate can easily lose their balance andfall in response to vehicle maneuvers.Falling from a moving vehicle may resultin serious injuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

You can open the tailgate by pulling up on theoutside handle while pulling the tailgate down.

When you put the tailgate back up, be sureit latches securely.

You can lock the tailgate using your ignition key.Turn the key counterclockwise to lock thetailgate. Turn the key clockwise to unlock thetailgate.

110

Removing the TailgateFollow these steps if you want to remove thetailgate:

1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightlyon the entire tailgate assembly.

Remove the retainingcables from both sides ofthe tailgate by pulling theclips away from the boltheads while pushing thecable bracket forward.When the larger part ofthe hole on the bracketis over the bolt, slide thebracket off of the bolt.

2. With the tailgate partially down, lift up onthe passenger’s side and pull the tailgatetoward you, then move the tailgate to theright to release the driver’s side. You canthen remove the entire tailgate assembly.

Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate.Make sure it is secure.

To partially lower the tailgate do the following:1. With the tailgate fully open, lift up slightly

on the entire tailgate assembly.2. Remove the

retaining cablefrom the passengerside of the tailgateby pulling theclip away from thebolt head whilepushing the cablebracket forward.

When the larger part of the hole on the bracketis over the bolt, slide the bracket off of the bolt.

3. Slide the lower end fitting onto the top bolt.The tailgate will now stay in the partiallyopened position.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the driver side.If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracketcannot be in the partially opened position andmust be anchored on the bottom bolt, using thetop position on the bracket.

Tailgate Partially Down

111

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

Manual WindowsOn a vehicle with manual windows, use thehandle on each door to open and close eachwindow.

112

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome fromextreme heat in warm or hot weather andsuffer permanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closing window.Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in the rear seatuse the window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

The power windowswitches for all windowsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.In addition, eachpassenger’s door hasits own switch.

The power windows will work when the ignitionis in ACC (Accessory) or ON or while RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) on page 121.

Pull the front of the switch up to raise the window.Press the front of the switch down to lower thewindow.

Do not hold all four power window switchesdown for several seconds after the windowshave been completely lowered or raised,because the vehicle may blow a fuse.

Crew Cab SwitchesShown

113

Express-Down WindowsThe driver’s window has an express-downfeature that allows the window to be loweredfully without continuously holding the switch.Press the front of the switch past the firstposition to activate the express-down mode.The express-down mode can be canceled atany time by pulling up on the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): If you have a crew cabvehicle with power windows, you will alsohave a window lockout button located forwardof the window switches. This feature disables thepassenger’s window switches when the windowlockout button is pressed. To turn the lockoutfeature on or off, press the window lockout button.A red band on the side of the button can beseen when the windows are not locked out.

Sliding Rear Window

If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latchin the center of the window and slide the glassto open it.

When you close the window, be sure the latch isengaged.

114

Sun VisorsTo block glare, pull the sun visor down. It can alsobe detached from the center mount and movedto the side to block glare from that direction.

Visor Vanity MirrorThe passenger’s side sun visor may have amirror. Pull down the visor to access the mirror.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

If your vehicle hasthe Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) system,the vehicle has acontent theft-deterrentalarm system.

To activate the content theft-deterrent system:

1. Close all the doors.

2. Lock the doors with the RKE transmitter.The security light, located on the instrumentpanel cluster, will flash.

If the lock button on the RKE transmitter ispressed, but a door is open, the horn will chirpsix times. Press the lock button again, withinthree seconds, and the doors will lock. Close theopen door and the system will be activated.

115

If a locked door is not opened using the RKEtransmitter, or by OnStar®, the pre-alarm willgo off. If the engine is not started or unlock notpressed within 10 seconds, the front turnsignal lamps will flash for two minutes, and thehorn will sound for two minutes, then will turn offto save the battery power.

Remember, the theft-deterrent system will notactivate if you lock the doors with a key, themanual door lock, or power door lock switch.The system can only be activated using theRKE transmitter, or by OnStar®. See OnStar®

System on page 149 for additional information.You should also remember that you can start yourvehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarmhas been set off.

Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:• If you do not want to activate the

theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should belocked with the door key after the doorsare closed.

• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.Unlocking a door any other way will set offthe alarm.

If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turnoff the alarm by pressing unlock on the RKEtransmitter. The alarm will not stop if you try tounlock a door any other way.

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, activate the systemby locking the doors with the RKE transmitter.

2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock andopen the door. This should set off the alarm.

3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter or start the engine.

If the alarm does not sound when it should butthe lights flash, check to see if the horn works.The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 433.

If the alarm does not sound or the front turn signallamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

116

Passlock®

Your vehicle has the Passlock® theft-deterrentsystem.

Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system.Passlock® enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinderis turned with a valid key. If an incorrect key isused or the ignition lock cylinder is tampered with,the fuel system is disabled and the vehicle willnot start.

During normal operation, the security light will turnoff approximately five seconds after the engineis started. See Security Light on page 196.

If the engine stalls and the security light flashes,wait about 10 minutes until the light stopsflashing before trying to restart the engine.Remember to release the key from START assoon as the engine starts.

If the engine does not start after three tries,the vehicle needs service.

If the engine is running and the security lightcomes on, you will be able to restart the engine ifyou turn the engine off. However, your Passlock®

system is not working properly and must beserviced by your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle isnot protected by Passlock® at this time. See yourdealer/retailer for service.

In an emergency, call the Roadside AssistanceCenter. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 466.

Do not leave the key or device that disarmsor deactivates the theft deterrent system inthe vehicle.

117

Starting and OperatingYour Vehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:

• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)or less for the first 500 miles (805 km).

• Do not drive at any one constant speed,fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for thefirst 200 miles (322 km) or so. During thistime the new brake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with new liningscan mean premature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow this breaking-inguideline every time you get newbrake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See Towing a Trailer on page 306 forthe trailer towing capabilities of yourvehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speed and loadcan be gradually increased.

118

Ignition PositionsWith the key inthe ignition switch,you can turn tofour differentpositions.

LOCK (A): This position locks the ignition. It alsolocks the transmission on automatic transmissionvehicles. It will locks the steering wheel on manualtransmission vehicles when the key is removed.It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only beable to remove your key when the ignition isturned to LOCK.

If you have an automatic transmission, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless theshift lever is in PARK (P).

Notice: Using a tool to force the key fromthe ignition switch could cause damageor break the key. Use the correct key and turnthe key only with your hand. Make sure thekey is all the way in. If it is, turn the steeringwheel left and right while you turn the keyhard. If none of this works, then your vehicleneeds service.

ACC (ACCESSORY) (B): This is the position inwhich you can operate your electrical accessoriesor items plugged into the accessory poweroutlets. On automatic transmission vehicles,this position unlocks the ignition. On manualtransmission vehicles, it unlocks the ignition andsteering wheel. Use this position if your vehiclemust be pushed or towed.

119

ON (C): This is the position that the switchreturns to after you start your engine and releasethe switch. The switch stays in ON when theengine is running. But even when the engine isnot running, you can use ON to operate theelectrical accessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warning and indicatorlights. The transmission is also unlocked inthis position on automatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ACC or ON position with the engine off. Youmay not be able to start your vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extended period of time.

START (D): This is the position that starts theengine. When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch returns to ON for driving.

When the engine is not running, ACC and ONallows you to operate the electrical accessories,such as the radio or items plugged into theaccessory power outlets.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor when the ignition is in ACC or LOCK andthe key is in the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transmission. Also, alwaysremember to lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave thekey in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle afterit has been parked for an extended periodof time.

120

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for upto 20 minutes after the engine is turned off:• Audio System• Wipers• Power Windows

These features work when the key is in ON orACC. Once the key is turned from ON to LOCK,power to these features continue to work forup to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in the proper gear.

Automatic TransmissionMove your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).Your engine will not start in any other position – thisis a safety feature. To restart when you are alreadymoving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if yourvehicle is moving. If you do, you could damagethe transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only whenyour vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransmissionThe shift lever should be in the NEUTRAL positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutchpedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as the engine gets warm. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motor damage.

121

To prevent gear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engine is alreadyrunning. Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch to the ACC orLOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holdingit there as you hold the key in START forup to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator.

If the vehicle starts briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine. Do not racethe engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer/retailer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.

122

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature.

In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, theengine coolant heater can help. You will get easierstarting and better fuel economy during enginewarm-up. Usually, the coolant heater shouldbe plugged in a minimum of four hours prior tostarting your vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F(0°C), use of the coolant heater is not required.Your vehicle may also have an internal thermostatin the plug end of the cord. This will preventoperation of the engine coolant heater when thetemperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) asnoted on the cord.

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located in the enginecompartment behind the underhood fuse blockon the driver’s side of the vehicle.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer/retailer in the area where you will be parkingyour vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give youthe best advice for that particular area.

123

Automatic Transmission Operation

Your automatic transmission has a shift lever onthe steering column.

It features an electronic shift position indicatorwithin the instrument cluster. This display mustbe powered anytime the shift lever is capableof being moved out of PARK (P). This means thatif your key is turned off, but not in LOCK, therewill be a small current drain on your battery whichcould discharge your battery over a period oftime. If you need to leave your key in the ignitionbut not in LOCK for an extended period, it isrecommended that you disconnect the batterycable from the battery to prevent dischargingyour battery.

There are several different positions for yourshift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.It is the best position to use when you startyour engine because your vehicle cannotmove easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when you are onfairly level ground, always set yourparking brake and move the shift leverto PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 135.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towinga Trailer on page 306.

124

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transmission shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes beforeyou can shift from PARK (P) when the ignitionkey is in ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever by pushingthe shift lever all the way into PARK (P) asyou maintain brake application. Then move theshift lever into another gear. See Shifting Outof Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 137.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damage thetransmission. The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty. Shift to REVERSE (R) onlyafter your vehicle is stopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get outof snow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 290.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is runningat high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) with the engine running athigh speed may damage the transmission.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not runningat high speed when shifting your vehicle.

125

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.If provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle.If you need more power for passing, and you are:• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push

your accelerator pedal about halfway down.• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push

the accelerator all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transmission in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 259.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You might choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)when driving on hilly, winding roads, whentowing a trailer, so there is less shifting betweengears and when going down a steep hill.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control your speed as you go down steepmountain roads, but then you would also want touse your brakes off and on.

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inFIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving forward, thetransmission will not shift into first gear until thevehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using onlythe accelerator pedal may damage thetransmission. The repair will not be covered byyour warranty. If you are stuck, do not spinthe tires. When stopping on a hill, use thebrakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Manual Transmission OperationThis is yourshift pattern.

126

Here is how to operate your manual transmission:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up on theclutch. Then press the clutch pedal back down andshift into FIRST (1).

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as youlet up on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5):Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5)the same way you do for SECOND (2). Slowlylet up on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.After the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shiftlever return to NEUTRAL and release the clutchpedal. Then press the clutch again and shift intoREVERSE (R). Do not attempt to shift into the fifthgear position prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).Your transmission has a lock out feature whichprevents a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transmission. The repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,for parking your vehicle.

127

Up-Shift Light

This light will showyou when to shift tothe next higher gearfor best fuel economy.

When this light comes on, you can shift to the nexthigher gear if weather, road and traffic conditionspermit. For the best fuel economy, accelerateslowly and shift when the light comes on.

While you accelerate, it is normal for the lightto go on and off if you quickly change theposition of the accelerator. Ignore the shiftlight when you downshift.

If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and has amanual transmission, disregard the shift lightwhen the transfer case is in four-wheel low.

For more information, see Up-Shift Light(Manual Transmission) on page 189.

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others.Do not shift down more than one gearat a time when you downshift.

128

Four-Wheel DriveIf your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can sendyour engine’s driving power to all four wheels forextra traction. To get the best performance out offour-wheel drive, you must be familiar with itsoperation. Read the part that follows before usingfour-wheel drive. You should use two-wheel-drivehigh for most normal driving conditions.

Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement infour-wheel drive for an extended period oftime can cause premature wear on yourvehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean,dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive forextended periods of time.

Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand the compact spare tire is installed onyour vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel driveuntil you can have your flat tire repaired and/orreplaced. You could damage your vehicle,and the repair costs would not be coveredby your warranty. Never use four-wheel drivewhen the compact spare tire is installedon your vehicle.

The transfer case buttons are located to the rightof the steering wheel on the instrument panel.

Recommended Transfer Case Settings

Driving ConditionsTransfer Case Settings

2 m 4 m 4 n N

Normal YES

Severe YES

Extreme YES

Vehicle in Tow* YES

*See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 300or Towing Your Vehicle on page 299 for furtherinformation.

129

Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheeldrive. You can choose from the following:

2 m(Two-Wheel High): This setting is for drivingin most street and highway situations. Yourfront axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive.

{CAUTION:

Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRALcan cause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P), or if youhave a manual transmission, even if youare in gear. You or someone else couldbe seriously injured. Be sure to set theparking brake before placing the transfercase in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brakeon page 133.

N (NEUTRAL): Shift the vehicle’s transfer caseto NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.

4 m(Four-Wheel High): This setting engagesyour front axle to help drive your vehicle. Usefour-wheel high when you need extra traction,such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most off-roadsituations.

4 n(Four-Wheel Low): This setting alsoengages your front axle to give you extra traction.It sends the maximum power to all four wheels.You might choose four-wheel low if you weredriving off-road in sand, mud, or deep snow andwhile climbing or descending steep hills.

Indicator lights in the buttons show you whichsetting you are in. The indicator lights will comeon briefly when you turn on the ignition andone will stay on the selected setting. If the lightsdo not come on, you should take your vehicle in forservice. An indicator light will flash while shifting.It will stay on when the shift is completed.

If for some reason the transfer case does not shift,it will return to the last chosen setting.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High toFour-Wheel HighPress and release the Four-Wheel High button.This can be done at any speed, and the frontaxle will lock automatically.

130

Shifting from Four-Wheel High toTwo-Wheel HighPress and release the Two-Wheel High button.This can be done at any speed, and the frontaxle will unlock automatically.

It is normal to hear and feel your vehicle’s transfercase shift into Four-Wheel High. If you shift withthe vehicle stopped, the indicator light maystill flash slowly. It may be necessary to shift thetransmission momentarily into REVERSE (R)and DRIVE (D), for an automatic transmission,or REVERSE (R) and FIRST (1) for a manualtransmission to have the light stop flashing.

Shifting from Two-Wheel High orFour-Wheel High to Four-Wheel LowTo shift from Two-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Highto Four-Wheel Low, the vehicle must be stoppedor moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with thetransmission in NEUTRAL (N) for an automatictransmission or the clutch pedal pressed fora manual transmission. The preferred method forshifting into Four-Wheel Low is to have yourvehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).

Press and release the Four-Wheel Low button.You must wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicatorlight to stop flashing and stay on before shiftingthe transmission into gear or releasing theclutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed whenyour vehicle is in gear and/or moving fasterthan 3 mph (5 km/h), the four-wheel low indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds and not completethe shift.

Shifting from Four-Wheel Low toTwo-Wheel High or Four-Wheel HighTo shift from Four-Wheel Low to Two-WheelHigh or Four-Wheel High, your vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)with the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) foran automatic transmission or the clutch pedalpressed for a manual transmission. The preferredmethod for shifting out of four-wheel low isto have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph(1.6 to 3.2 km/h).

131

Press and release the Four-Wheel High orTwo-Wheel High button. You must wait for theFour-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High indicator lightto stop flashing and stay on before shifting thetransmission into gear or releasing the clutch pedal.

If the Four-Wheel High or Two-Wheel High buttonis pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/ormoving faster than 3 mph (5km/h), the Four-WheelHigh or Two Wheel High indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds but not complete the shift.

Shifting to NEUTRALUse NEUTRAL when you plan to tow your vehicle.See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 300for towing instructions. To shift the transfer caseinto NEUTRAL do the following:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Start the vehicle.

3. Press the regular brake pedal and shiftthe transmission in NEUTRAL (N), orpress in the clutch for vehicles with amanual transmission.

4. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.

5. Press and hold the Two-Wheel High andFour-Wheel Low buttons at the same timefor 10 seconds. The NEUTRAL (N) lightwill come on when the transfer case shift toNEUTRAL (N) is complete.

6. Press and hold the regular brake pedal andshift the transmission to REVERSE (R) forone second, then shift the transmissionto DRIVE (D) for one second, or FIRST (1) forvehicles with manual transmissions, and letout the clutch to insure the transfer case is inNEUTRAL. If the vehicle is not in NEUTRAL,repeat this procedure starting at Step 3.

7. Turn the engine off by turning the key to ACC.

8. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P),or FIRST (1) for vehicles that have a manualtransmission.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK.

132

Shifting Out of NEUTRALAfter towing your vehicle, you will have to shiftout of NEUTRAL in order to drive. To shift outof NEUTRAL, do the following:

1. Set the parking brake and apply the regularbrake pedal.

2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmissionin PARK (P). Use FIRST (1) for vehicles witha manual transmission.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N), orpress the clutch pedal for vehicles with amanual transmission.

4. Press the button for the desired transfer caseshift position (Two-Wheel High, Four-WheelHigh, or Four-Wheel Low).

5. After the transfer case has shifted out ofNEUTRAL, the indicator light will go out.

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Shift the transmission to the desired position.

Parking BrakeThe parking brakepedal is located tothe left of the regularbrake pedal, nearthe driver’s door.

To set the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with your right foot. Push theparking brake pedal down to its fully-appliedposition with your left foot.

A chime will activate and the brake warninglight, located on the instrument panel, will flashwhen the parking brake is applied and the vehicleis moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at leastthree seconds. The chime will deactivate and thelight will turn off when the parking brake is setand the vehicle is moving below 3 mph (5 km/h).See Brake System Warning Light on page 189.

133

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down. Pull the bottom edge ofthe lever, located above the parking brake pedal,with the parking brake symbol, directly rearwardto release the parking brake.

If the ignition is on when the parking brake isreleased, the brake system warning light willgo off.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and are parking onany hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 306.

134

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others couldbe injured. To be sure your vehicle willnot move, even when you are on fairlylevel ground, use the steps that follow.If you are pulling a trailer, see Towinga Trailer on page 306.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and set the parking brake.See Parking Brake on page 133 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

If you have four-wheel drive, your vehiclewill be free to roll — even if your shiftlever is in PARK (P) — if your transfercase is in NEUTRAL. So, be sure thetransfer case is in a drive gear, two-wheelhigh (2H) or four-wheel high (4H) orfour-wheel low (4L) — not in NEUTRAL.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) bypulling the lever toward you and movingit up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you.If you can leave your vehicle with thekey, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

135

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transmission)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leaveyour vehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P)and your parking brake is firmly set before youleave it. After you have moved the shift leverinto PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal down.Then, see if you can move the shift lever awayfrom PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you.If you can, it means that the shift lever wasnot fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour transmission into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in the transmission.You may find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting IntoPark (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 135.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need tohave another vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transmission, so you can pull the shiftlever out of PARK (P).

136

Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transmission)Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shiftlock control system which locks the shift leverin PARK (P) when the ignition is in the LOCKposition. In addition, you have to fully apply theregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in ON. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 124.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever by pushing the shift lever allthe way into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then, move the shift lever intothe gear you want.

If you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to ACC. There is no shiftinterlock in this key position.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end ofStep 4.

3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gearyou want.

5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transmission)Your vehicle has a manual transmission.Before you get out of your vehicle, move theshift lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly applythe parking brake. Once the shift lever hasbeen placed into REVERSE (R) with the clutchpedal pressed in, turn the ignition key to LOCK,remove the key and release the clutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle ispulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 306.

137

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

138

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is cominginto your vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

139

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 139.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan isat the highest setting. One place thiscan happen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER parkin a garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 286.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transmission shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to.If you have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transmissionshift lever to PARK (P), or the manualtransmission shift lever to NEUTRAL.

140

{CAUTION:

Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfercase in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle toroll, even if the automatic transmissionshift lever is in PARK (P). So, be sure thetransfer case is in a drive gear — not inNEUTRAL. Always set the parking brake.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transmission) on page 135.

If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 306.

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Grip the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side. The control atthe bottom of the mirror is the day/night featurethat allows adjustment to the mirror so thatthe glare of headlamps from behind is reduced.Push the control for daytime use; pull it fornight use.

141

Manual Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar®

Mirror OperationYour vehicle may have a manual rearview mirrorwith the OnStar® System. You can adjust the mirrorfor day or night driving. Press the tab forward forday driving. Pull the tab back for night driving.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and how to subscribeto OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 149for more information about the services OnStar®

provides.

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on themirror housing.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with OnStar®, Compassand Temperature DisplayYour vehicle may have this feature. When on,the automatic dimming mirror dims to the properlevel to minimize glare from lights behind youafter dark.

The mirror has a dual display in the upper rightcorner of the mirror face that shows the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at thebottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System onpage 149 for more information about the servicesOnStar® provides.

P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.

Temperature and Compass DisplayPress the on/off button, located to the farleft, briefly to turn the compass/temperaturedisplay on or off.

142

If the display reads CAL, the compass needsto be calibrated. For more information, see“Compass Calibration” following.

To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius:

1. Press and hold the on/off button forapproximately four seconds until eithera flashing F or C appears.

2. Press the button again to change the displayto the desired unit of measurement. Afterapproximately four seconds of inactivity,the new unit will be locked in and thecompass/temperature display will return.

If an abnormal temperature reading is displayedfor an extended period of time, see yourdealer/retailer. Under certain circumstances, adelay in updating the temperature is normal.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationThe automatic dimming mirror comes on each timethe ignition is turned to start. To turn the automaticdimming feature off or back on, press the on/offbutton. The indicator light on the mirror is lit whenthe automatic dimming feature is on.

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading, N forNorth, for example, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic notepad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayedin the mirror compass windows. If CAL isnot displayed, push the on/off button forapproximately 12 seconds or until CAL isdisplayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction.

143

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if thevehicle is outside of zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustfor compass variance. Compass variance isthe difference between earth’s magnetic north andtrue geographic north. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, the compass couldgive false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z anda zone number appears in the display.The compass is now in zone mode.

3. Keep pressing the on/off button until thedesired zone number appears in the display.Release the button. After approximatelyfour seconds of inactivity, the new zonenumber will be locked in and the compass/temperature display will return.

144

Cleaning the MirrorWhen cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel orsimilar material dampened with glass cleaner.Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirroras that may cause the liquid cleaner to enterthe mirror housing.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror with Compass andTemperature DisplayYour vehicle may have this mirror. When on,an automatic dimming mirror will dim to theproper level to minimize glare from lights behindyou after dark.

The mirror also includes a dual display in theupper right corner of the mirror with the compassreading and the outside temperature.

Yb: Briefly press this button to turn the displayon or off.

Temperature DisplayThe temperature can be displayed by pressingthe compass/temperature button. Pressing thecompass/temperature button once briefly, willtoggle the display reading on and off. To alternatethe temperature reading between Fahrenheit andCelsius, press and hold the compass/temperaturebutton for approximately three seconds untilthe display blinks F and C. After approximatelyfive seconds of inactivity, the display will stopblinking and display the last selection made.

If an abnormal reading is displayed, see yourdealer/retailer.

Automatic Dimming Mirror OperationO: Press this button to turn the automaticdimming feature on or off. The indicator light tothe left of the button will turn on to indicate whenthe feature is on. Once the mirror is turned off,it will remain off until it is turned back on, or untilthe vehicle is restarted.

Compass OperationPress the compass/temperature button oncebriefly to turn the display on or off.

145

Compass CalibrationThe compass may need calibration if one of thefollowing occurs:

• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.

• After approximately five seconds, the displaydoes not show a compass heading, N forNorth, for example, there may be a strongmagnetic field interfering with the compass.Such interference may be caused by amagnetic antenna mount, magnetic notepad holder, or a similar magnetic item.

• The compass does not display the correctheading and the compass zone varianceis set correctly.

In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayedin the mirror compass windows. If CAL isnot displayed, push in the compass/temperaturebutton for approximately nine seconds or untilCAL is displayed.

The compass can be calibrated by driving thevehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less untilthe display reads a direction.

Compass VarianceThe mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving thefactory. It will be necessary to adjust the compassto compensate for compass variance if thevehicle is outside zone eight. Under certaincircumstances, as during a long distancecross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjustfor compass variance. Compass variance isthe difference between earth’s magnetic north andtrue geographic north. If not adjusted to accountfor compass variance, your compass couldgive false readings.

To adjust for compass variance:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the following zone map.

146

2. Press and hold the compass/temperaturebutton for six seconds until a zone numberappears in the display.

3. Press the compass/temperature button on thebottom of the mirror until the new zone numberappears in the display. After you stop pressingthe button, the display will show a compassdirection within a few seconds.

Cleaning the MirrorUse a paper towel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the mirror as that may cause the liquidcleaner to enter the mirror housing.

Outside Manual MirrorsIf the vehicle has manual outside mirrors, adjustthem by hand so that the side of the vehicle canbe seen while you are sitting in a comfortabledriving position.

The mirrors can be folded inward to preventdamage when going through an automatic carwash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle.To return the mirror to its original position, pushoutward. Return both mirrors to the unfoldedposition before driving.

147

Outside Power Mirrors

If your vehicle hasthis feature, the controlsare located on thedriver’s door armrest.

To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:

1. Move the selector switch to the L (left)or R (right) to choose the driver’s orpassenger’s mirror.

2. Use the arrows located on the four-waycontrol pad to move the mirror in thedirection you want the mirror to go.

3. Return the selector switch to the centerposition once the mirrors are adjusted.

If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, themirror has reached the end of its travel and can gono farther in that direction. To stop the sound,reverse the mirror direction using the control pad.The mirrors can be manually folded inward toprevent damage when going through an automaticcar wash. To fold, push the mirror toward thevehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors tothe unfolded position before driving.

Outside Convex MirrorYour passenger’s outside rearview mirror isconvex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved soyou can see more from the driver’s seat.

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away than theyreally are. If you cut too sharply into theright lane, you could hit a vehicle on yourright. Check your inside mirror or glanceover your shoulder before changing lanes.

148

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button andthey can contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subjectto the OnStar® Terms and Conditions. Youmay cancel your OnStar® service at any timeby contacting OnStar® as provided below.A complete OnStar® Owner’s Guide and theOnStar® Terms and Conditions are includedin the vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriber glove boxliterature. For more information, visit onstar.comor onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide inyour glove box or visit onstar.com.

149

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyondthe first year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan. For more information, pressthe OnStar® button to speak with an advisor.Some OnStar® services (such as Remote DoorUnlock or Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance) maynot be available until you register with OnStar®.

Available Services withSafe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor deliveredor OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation(If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

150

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility serviceplan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To findout more, refer to the OnStar® Owner’s Guidein the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.comor www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar®

advisor by pressing the OnStar® button orcalling 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, youcan browse through the various topics. See theOnStar® Owner’s Guide for more information.(Only available in the continental U.S.)

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interact with OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can beused to dial numbers into voicemail systems,or to dial phone extensions. See the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide for more information.

151

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use theVirtual Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling, your vehicle also sends OnStar® yourGPS location so that we can provide youwith location-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and availablein that place as well.

152

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) forthe OnStar® equipment to operate. There areother problems OnStar® cannot control thatmay prevent OnStar® from providing OnStar®

service to you at any particular time or place.Some examples are damage to important partsof your vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather or wireless phone networkcongestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the lightnext to the OnStar® buttons is red, this meansthat your system is not functioning properlyand should be checked by a dealer. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing), yourOnStar® subscription has expired. You canalways press the blue OnStar® button toconfirm that your OnStar® equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, pull on the lever.

Cupholder(s)Your vehicle may have two cupholders locatedon the lower part of the front doors as well astwo cupholders located at the front end ofthe console. Vehicles with bench seats mayhave cupholders attached to the front of thecenter seat.

If your vehicle is an extended cab or crew cabmodel, your vehicle also has two rear cupholders.On crew cab models, the cupholders are locatedat the front end of the rear center seat cushion.On extended cab models, the rear seat cupholdersare located on top of the rear center console.

If you have an ashtray, it will use one of thecupholders.

153

Front Armrest Storage AreaFor vehicles with bench seats, you may have acenter armrest storage area. Lift up on the uppertab located at the front of the armrest to releasethe latch. Lift the lid to open the storage area.

For vehicles with bucket seats or uplevelpackages, your vehicle may have a two-tieredcenter armrest storage area. Lift up on the uppertab located at the front of the armrest to releasethe latch. Lift the lid to the top storage area.A second tab is located below the top one andallows you to access the bottom storage area.Lift up on the lower tab to release the latch.Then, raise the lid of the lower storage area.The upper storage area will lift up with the lidof the lower storage area.

To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s)until you feel the latch close.

Assist HandlesYour vehicle may have assist handles to be usedwhen getting out of your vehicle. If your vehiclehas assist handles, they are located abovethe doors.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactair bags, there are assist handles located aboveboth the driver’s and front passenger’s doors.

Rear Storage AreaIf your vehicle is an extended cab model,it might have storage compartments underthe rear seats.

154

To access the storage compartments, lift thecushion on the bottom of the rear seats. Thisexposes the storage boxes under the seat.

To open a storage box, unhook the bottom andlift the two latches on each side of the storage box.

155

Lift the lid from the center area to access thestorage box.

SunroofYour vehicle may have a sunroof.

The sunroof controlbuttons are locatedon the headliner.

Q (Open/Vent): Press and hold this buttonto vent, and open the sunroof. Release the buttonwhen the desired position is reached.

R (Close): Press and hold this button to closethe sunroof. Release the button when the desiredposition is reached.

The sunshade must be opened manually.

156

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 160Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 162Other Warning Devices ............................. 162Horn .......................................................... 162Tilt Wheel .................................................. 162Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 163Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 164Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 165Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 165Windshield Wipers ..................................... 165Windshield Washer .................................... 166Cruise Control ........................................... 166Exterior Lamps .......................................... 170Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 171Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 171Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 172Fog Lamps ................................................ 173Exterior Cargo Lamps ................................ 174Interior Lamps ........................................... 174Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 174Dome Lamp .............................................. 174

Dome Lamp Override ................................ 175Exit Lighting .............................................. 175Electric Power Management ...................... 175Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 175Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 176Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 177

Climate Controls ......................................... 177Climate Control System ............................. 177Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 180

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 181Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 182Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 183Trip Odometer ........................................... 183Tachometer ............................................... 183Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 184Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 184Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 185Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 186Battery Warning Light ................................ 188Up-Shift Light (Manual Transmission) ........ 189

Section 3 Instrument Panel

157

Brake System Warning Light ..................... 189Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 190Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 191Tire Pressure Light .................................... 191Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 192Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 195Security Light ............................................ 196Cruise Control Light .................................. 196Highbeam On Light ................................... 196Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

Indicator Light ........................................ 197Fuel Gage ................................................. 197

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 198DIC Controls and Displays ........................ 198DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 202

Audio System(s) ......................................... 206Setting the Time ........................................ 208AM-FM Radio ............................................ 209Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 212Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 222Using an MP3 ........................................... 234XM Radio Messages ................................. 240Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 242Radio Reception ........................................ 242Care of Your CDs ..................................... 243Care of the CD Player .............................. 243Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 244XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 244Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 244

Section 3 Instrument Panel

158

✍ NOTES

159

Instrument Panel Overview

Manual Transmission shown, Automatic Transmission similar

160

The main components of your vehicle’s instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 180.

B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 163.

C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 182.

D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 162.

E. Passenger Side Airbag. See Airbag Systemon page 77.

F. Exterior Lamp Controls. See Exterior Lampson page 170. Fog Lamps (If Equipped).See Fog Lamps on page 173. ExteriorCargo Lamps. See Exterior Cargo Lampson page 174.

G. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brakeon page 133.

H. Horn. See Horn on page 162.I. Traction Control Button or Four-Wheel Drive

Buttons. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 253 and Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.

J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 206.

K. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s)and Cigarette Lighter on page 177.

L. Climate Control System. See Climate ControlSystem on page 177.

M. Accessory Power Outlet. See AccessoryPower Outlet(s) on page 176.

N. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 186.

O. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 153.

161

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem.The front and rear turn signal lamps will flashon and off.

The hazard warningflasher button islocated on theinstrument panel,between thetwo air vents inthe center.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, theturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set one upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornTo sound the horn, press the horn symbol on thesteering wheel pad.

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheelbefore you drive. The tilt steering wheel can beraised to the highest level to allow more room forthe driver to enter and exit the vehicle.

162

The tilt lever is located on the left side of thesteering column, under the turn signal lever.

To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt levertoward you. Move the wheel to a comfortablelevel, then release the tilt lever to lock the wheelin place.

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:• GTurn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn

Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 163.• 53Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 165.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 165.• NWindshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers

on page 165.• LWindshield Washer. See Windshield

Washer on page 166.• JCruise Control. See Cruise Control on

page 166.

163

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionsallow you to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way upor down. When the turn is finished, the lever willautomatically return to the off position.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there untilthe change is completed. The lever will return byitself when released.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster will flash inthe direction of theturn or lane change.

As you signal a turn or a lane change, if thearrows flash more quickly than normal, a signalbulb may be burned out and other drivers willnot see your vehicle’s turn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid anaccident. If the arrows do not go on at all whensignaling a turn, check for a burned-out bulb or ablown fuse. For bulb replacement, see Taillamps,Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lampson page 373. For a blown fuse or circuit breaker,see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 433

Turn Signal On ChimeIf a turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of amile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash ofthe turn signal and the message TURN SIGNALwill also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime andmessage off, move the turn signal lever to theoff position.

See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings andMessages on page 202 for more information.

164

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):To change the headlamps from low to high beam,push the lever toward the instrument panel.To return to low-beam headlamps, pull themultifunction lever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beamsare on, this indicatorlight on the instrumentpanel cluster will alsobe on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use the high-beam headlampsto signal a driver in front of you that you want topass. It works even if the headlamps are in theautomatic position.

To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you,then release it.

If your headlamps are in the automatic positionor on low beam, your high-beam headlamps willturn on. They will stay on as long as you hold thelever toward you. The high-beam indicator on theinstrument panel cluster will come on. Releasethe lever to return to normal operation.

Windshield WipersYou control the windshield wipers by turning theband with the wiper symbol on it.

The windshield wipers work in all ignition positions,except off. This includes the Retained AccessPower mode. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 121.

8 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, turn the bandto mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then letgo. The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you wantmore wipes, hold the band on mist longer.

N (Delay): You can set the wiper speed for along or short delay between wipes. This can be veryuseful in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choosethe delay time. The closer to the top of the lever,the shorter the delay.

165

6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at lowspeed, turn the band away from you to thefirst solid position past the delay settings.

1 (High Speed): For high-speed wiping,turn the band to the second solid position pastthe delay settings.

9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band to off.

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they’re frozen tothe windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them.If your blades do become worn or damaged,get new blades or blade inserts.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

QL (Washer Fluid): There is a paddle markedwith the windshield washer symbol at the topof the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid onthe windshield, push the paddle. The wipers willclear the window and then either stop or return toyour preset speed.

Cruise Control

The cruise controlset button is locatedat the end of themultifunction lever.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe system off.

R (On): Move the lever to this position to turn thesystem on.

166

+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to thisposition to make the vehicle accelerate or resumeto a previously set speed.

rT (Set): Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, the vehicle can maintaina speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or morewithout keeping your foot on the accelerator.This can really help on long trips. Cruisecontrol does not work at speeds below about25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control will not work if the parking brakeis set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid levelis low.

If the brakes are applied, the cruise controlwill shut off.

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS) and it begins to limit wheel spin whilethe cruise control is on, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 253. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you can turncruise control back on.

167

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control lever to the on position.2. Get up to the speed you want.3. Press the set button at the end of the

lever and release it.4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

The cruise symbol onthe instrument panel willbe lit when the cruisecontrol is engaged.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set the cruise control to a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This turns offthe cruise control. But it does not need to be reset.

Once you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

The vehicle will go right back up to your chosenspeed and stay there.

If you hold the lever at resume/accelerate thevehicle will keep going faster until you release thelever or apply the brake. Do not hold the leverat resume/accelerate if you do not want the vehicleto go faster.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end ofthe lever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed. If the accelerator pedal is heldlonger than 60 seconds, cruise control willturn off.

168

• Move the cruise lever from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thespeed desired, and then release the lever.To increase your speed in very small amounts,move the lever briefly to resume/accelerate.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control• Press and hold the set button until you reach

the lower speed desired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, brieflypress the set button.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed you set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might want to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain the vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake or shift to alower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlTo turn off the cruise control, do one of the following:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal.

• Move the cruise control lever to off.

• Lightly tap or press the clutch, if you have amanual transmission.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

169

Exterior Lamps

The control on the driver’s side of the instrumentpanel operates the exterior lamps.

O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located tothe right of this symbol, to choose one of thefour exterior lamp positions.

9 (Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn offall exterior lamps including the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

AUTO: Turn the knob to this position toautomatically turn on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• Parking Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

See Automatic Headlamp System on page 172 formore information.

170

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the knob to thisposition to turn on the parking lamps, togetherwith the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

2 (Headlamps): Turn the knob to this position toturn on the headlamps, together with the previouslylisted lamps and lights.

You can switch the headlamps from low to highbeam by pushing the turn signal/multifunction levertoward the instrument panel.

Headlamps on ReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chime will soundwhen the headlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on and your key is out of theignition. To turn off the chime, turn the headlampswitch to off and then back on. In the automaticmode, the headlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK.

If your vehicle was first sold in Canada andthe parking lamps are turned on manually, theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) will stay on.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

171

The DRL system will come on when the followingconditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The transmission is not in PARK (P) if youhave an automatic transmission.

• The light sensor determines it is daytime.

Your vehicle will have either the parking lamps orreduced intensity low beams used as the DRL.When the DRL are on, only those lamps will be on.The taillamps, sidemarkers, and other lamps willnot be on. The instrument panel will not be litup either.

When it begins to get dark, the headlamps willautomatically switch from DRL to the regularheadlamps.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when you need it.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system will turn on after thetransmission has been shifted from PARK (P) toDRIVE (D). The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker,parking lamps, roof marker lamps, and theinstrument panel lights will turn on at normalbrightness. The radio lights will become more dimwhen the headlights are off compared to whenthe headlights are on.

Your vehicle has a light sensor located on thetop of the instrument panel. Be sure it is notcovered, or the system will be on whenever theignition is on.

The system may also turn on the headlamps whendriving through a parking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

172

There is a delay in the transition betweenthe daytime and nighttime operation of theDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automaticheadlamp system so that driving under bridgesor bright overhead street lights does not affectthe system. The DRL and automatic headlampsystem will only be affected when the light sensordetects a change in lighting lasting longer thanthe delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system will come onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it willtake about one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrument panel clustermay not be as bright as usual. Make surethe instrument panel brightness control is inthe full bright position. See Instrument PanelBrightness on page 174.

Fog LampsIf your vehicle has fog lamps, you can use themfor better vision in foggy or misty conditions.Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlampsmust be on for your fog lamps to work.

The fog lamp button islocated near the exteriorlamps control.

Press the button to turn the fog lamps on whilethe headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press thebutton again to turn them off. An indicator lightwill glow in the button when the fog lamps are on.Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off asmuch light as your headlamps. Never use your foglamps in the dark without turning on the headlamps.The fog lamps will go off whenever yourhigh-beam headlamps come on. When the highbeams go off, the fog lamps will come on again.Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

173

Exterior Cargo LampsThe cargo lamps can be used if more light isneeded in the cargo area of the vehicle or in thetop-box storage units.

Press this button,located on thedriver side of theinstrument panelnear the exteriorlamp control, toturn the cargolamps on and off.

The dome lamps must be on for the cargo lampsto come on. See Dome Lamp on page 174.

Interior LampsThe thumbwheel for the interior lamps is locatednext to the exterior lamps control. See ExteriorLamps on page 170 for additional informationon location.

Instrument Panel Brightness

D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn thethumbwheel up or down to brighten or dim theinstrument panel lights and the radio display.The instrument panel lights, cluster, and radiodisplay do not dim to complete darkness.The instrument panel light brightness controlwill only work if the headlamps or parking lampsare on. See Exterior Lamps on page 170.

Dome LampThe dome lamp will come on when a door isopened. They will shut off several seconds afterall doors are closed.

You can also turn the dome lamp on manuallyby turning the interior lamps thumbwheel allthe way up. In this position, the dome lamp willremain on whether a door is opened or closed.See Interior Lamps on page 174 for additionalinformation on location.

174

Dome Lamp Override

E (Dome Override): Press this button, locatedbelow the exterior lamp control, to turn thedome lamp off even when a door is opened.See Exterior Lamps on page 170 for moreinformation on location.

To return the lamp to automatic operation,press the button again.

Exit LightingWith exit lighting, the interior lamps will comeon when you remove the key from the ignition.The lamps will not come on if the dome overridebutton is pressed in.

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)that estimates the battery’s temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltage for bestperformance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage, you maysee the voltage move up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if the electricalloads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator (alternator) may notbe spinning fast enough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very high electrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads pluggedinto accessory power outlets.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is lefton for more than 20 minutes when the ignitionis in LOCK. This will help prevent your batteryfrom running down.

175

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Your vehicle may have accessory power outlets.

With accessory power outlets you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

Your vehicle may have two accessory poweroutlets located on the lower part of the instrumentpanel below the climate control system andthere may be one located on the rear of thecenter console. A small cap must be pulled downto access an accessory power outlet. Whennot using an outlet be sure to cover it with theprotective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysunplug electrical equipment when not in useand do not plug in equipment that exceeds themaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.If you experience a problem, see your dealer foradditional information on accessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outletcan cause damage not covered by yourwarranty. Do not hang any type of accessoryor accessory bracket from the plug becausethe power outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

176

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a removable ashtrayand cigarette lighter.

The ashtray is located in the center consolearea. The ashtray can be removed for cleaning.When the ashtray is removed, this area canalso be used as a cupholder.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle.Never put flammable items in the ashtray.

To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and letgo. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in whileit is heating does not let the lighter backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse couldbe blown. Do not hold a cigarette lighterin while it is heating.

Climate Controls

Climate Control System

With this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

177

Temperature KnobThe left knob on the control panel is used toadjust the temperature of the air in the vehicle.Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwiseto increase or decrease the temperature.

Fan Knob

9 (Fan): The center knob on the control panelis used to control the fan speed. Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed.

If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside airwill still enter the vehicle and will be directedaccording to the position of the mode knob.

Mode KnobThe right knob on the control panel is used todirect the airflow inside your vehicle. Turn theknob to select one of the following modes:

H (Vent): Select this mode to direct air tothe instrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Select this mode to directapproximately half of the air to the instrumentpanel outlets, and the remaining air to thefloor outlets and the defroster and side windowoutlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outletsand warmer air to the floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Select this mode to direct air to thefloor outlets. Recirculation is disabled in this modebecause interior window could fog under someconditions. If this occurs, see “Defogging andDefrosting” following.

Mode Buttons

@ (Recirculation): This mode recirculates airinside the cabin, and prevents outside air fromcoming in the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside odors from entering your vehicle andcool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Pressthis button to turn the recirculation mode on oroff. An indicator light on the button will come on tolet you know the recirculation mode is activated.

178

Recirculation is only available in the bi-level andvent modes. It should only be used while in bi-leveland vent modes. Recirculation is not available,and the light will not come on or flash while in heat,floor, floor/defog, or defrost modes.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. An indicatorlight on the button will come on to let you knowthe air conditioning is activated. When the systemis on, this setting cools and dehumidifies theair entering your vehicle.

The air conditioning will not function if the fan isturned off.

You may notice a slight change in engineperformance when the air conditioning compressorshuts off and turns on again. This is normal.The system is designed to make adjustments tohelp with fuel economy while still maintainingthe selected temperature.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you may sometimes notice asmall amount of water dripping underneathyour vehicle while idling or after turning off theengine. This is normal.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if theclimate control system is used properly. Thereare two modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield and side windows. Use the defogmode to clear the windows of fog or moisture andwarm the passengers. Use the defrost mode toremove fog or frost from the windshield morequickly. For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield before defrosting.

179

Turn the mode knob on the climate control panelclockwise to select the defog or defrost modes.

/ (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the air to thewindshield, the side window outlets, and to the flooroutlets. When you select this mode, the systemruns the air conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is near freezing or below.Recirculation is not available in this mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode directs most of theair to the windshield, and the side window outlets.When you select this mode, the system runsthe air conditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is near, or below freezing.Recirculation is not available in this mode.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the thumbwheel on the outlets to change thedirection of the air flow.

Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel locatedin the center of the outlet to direct the air upor down, or slide the thumbwheel to the left orright to direct the airflow from side-to-side.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of yourvehicle more effectively.

180

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights andgages on your vehicle. The pictures help tolocate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to the warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be oris a problem with one of your vehicle’s functions.As the details show on the next few pages,some warning lights come on briefly when youstart the engine just to let you know they areworking. If you are familiar with this section, youshould not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work togetherto let you know when there is a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your vehicle’s warninglights and gages. They can be a big help.

Your vehicle may also have a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with the warninglights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 198 for more information.

181

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running.You will know how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other thingsyou will need to know to drive safely and economically.

United States automatic transmission version shown, Canada similar

182

Speedometer and OdometerYour speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h).

Your odometer shows how far your vehiclehas been driven, in either miles (used in theUnited States) or kilometers (used in Canada).

The odometer mileage can be checked without thevehicle running. Simply press the trip informationstem. See “Odometer” under DIC Controlsand Displays on page 198 for more information.

You may wonder what happens if your vehicleneeds a new odometer installed. If the new onecan be set to the mileage total of the old odometer,then it must be. But if it cannot, then it is set atzero, and a label must be put on the driver’s doorto show the old mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerYour vehicle has a trip odometer that can tellyou how far your vehicle has been driven sinceyou last set the trip odometer to zero.

See “Trip Odometer” under DIC Controls andDisplays on page 198 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the engine speed inrevolutions per minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not operate the engine with the tachometerin the shaded warning area.

183

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill be provided for several seconds to remindpeople to buckle their safety belts. The driversafety belt light will also be provided and stayon for several seconds, then it will flash forseveral more. You should buckle your seat belt.

This chime and lightwill be repeated ifthe driver remainsunbuckled and thevehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chimenor the light will be provided.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several secondsto remind the front passenger to buckle theirsafety belt. This would only occur if the passengerairbag is enabled. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 88 for more information. Thepassenger safety belt light will also come on andstay on for several seconds, then it will flashfor several more.

This chime and lightare repeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle isin motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled,neither the chime nor the light will come on.

184

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there isan electrical problem. The system check includesthe airbag sensors, the airbag modules, thewiring and the crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystems, see Airbag System on page 77.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle servicedright away if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.If the light does not come on then, have it fixedso it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

185

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

There is a label on your sun visor that says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”This is because the risk to the rear-facing childis so great if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


186


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be transportedin vehicles with a rear seat that willaccommodate a rear-facing child restraint,whenever possible.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when youhave a rear-facing child restraint installedin the right front passenger’s seat, itmeans that the passenger sensing systemhas not turned off the passenger’s frontalairbag. A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured orkilled if the right front passenger’s airbaginflates. This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint would be veryclose to the inflating airbag. Do not usea rear-facing child restraint in the rightfront passenger’s seat if the airbag isturned on.

187

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 88 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together,it means that something may be wrongwith the airbag system. If this everhappens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 185.

Battery Warning Light

This light will comeon briefly when youstart the vehicle,as a check to showyou it is working;then it should go out.

If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the electricalcharging system. Have it checked right away.Driving while this light is on could drain yourbattery and result in a vehicle that may stall.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202for more information.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and climate control system.

188

Up-Shift Light(Manual Transmission)

This light appearswhen you need toshift to the next highergear on a manualtransmission vehicle.

Shifting when the indicator light is on will help youget the best fuel economy. See “Up-Shift Light”under Manual Transmission Operation onpage 126 for more information.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, theother part can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there could be abrake problem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.


189

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set your parkingbrake. See Parking Brake on page 133 for moreinformation. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on after yourparking brake is fully released, it means you have abrake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may notice that thepedal is harder to push, or the pedal may go closerto the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the lightis still on, have the vehicle towed for service.See Towing Your Vehicle on page 299.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), this lightwill come on briefly whenyou start your engineto show it is working.Then it will turn off.This is normal.

If the light stays on, or comes on when you aredriving, your vehicle needs service. If the regularbrake system warning light is not on, you stillhave brakes, but you do not have anti-lock brakes.If the regular brake system warning light is alsoon, you do not have anti-lock brakes and there isa problem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 189.

The ABS warning light should come on brieflywhen you turn the ignition key to ON. If the lightdoes not come on then, have it fixed so it willbe ready to warn you if there is a problem.

190

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows theengine coolanttemperature.

If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage,the engine is too hot. It means that your enginecoolant has overheated. If you have beenoperating your vehicle under normal drivingconditions, you should pull off the road, stopyour vehicle and turn off the engine as soonas possible.

See Engine Overheating on page 348 formore information.

Tire Pressure Light

This light should comeon briefly when you turnthe ignition to ON.

This light will also come on when one or moreof your tires are significantly underinflated.A LOW TIRE message will also appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC), see DIC Warningsand Messages on page 202 for more information.

Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to doso. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 377 for more information.

This light will flash for 60 seconds and then turn onsolid if a problem is detected with the Tire PressureMonitor system. See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 385 for more information.

191

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle hasa computer whichmonitors operationof the fuel, ignition,and emissioncontrol systems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designedto assist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be coveredby your warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and can causethis light to come on. Modifications to thesesystems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 324.

192

This light should come on, as a check to show youit is working, when the ignition is on and the engineis not running. If the light does not come on, haveit repaired. This light will also come on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has beendetected. A misfire increases vehicle emissionsand may damage the emission control systemon your vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected onyour vehicle. Diagnosis and service maybe required.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce theamount of cargo being hauled as soonas it is possible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe todo so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for serviceas soon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 328.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few drivingtrips with the cap properly installed should turnthe light off.

193

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 326. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.(These conditions may go away once the engineis warmed up.) This will be detected by thesystem and cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance ProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designedto evaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take severaldays of routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspectionfor lack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

194

Oil Pressure Light

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

The light will come onwhen you turn yourkey to ON or START.

It goes off once you start your engine. That isa check to be sure the light works. If it does notcome on, be sure to have it fixed so it will bethere to warn you if something goes wrong.

When the light comes on and stays on, it meansthat oil is not flowing through the engine properly.The vehicle could be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem. See EngineOil on page 333 and “OIL” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 202 for more information.

195

Security Light

This light will come onbriefly when you turnthe key to START.The light will stay onuntil the engine starts.

If the ignition is turned on, and the light flashes,the Passlock® system has entered a tampermode. If the vehicle fails to start, see Passlock®

on page 117.

If the light comes on continuously while drivingand stays on, there may be a problem withthe Passlock® system. Your vehicle will not beprotected by Passlock®, and you should seeyour dealer.

Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 115for additional information regarding the securitylight.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 166 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 165 for more information.

196

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Indicator Light

This light turnson whenever theDaytime RunningLamps are on.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 171for more information.

Fuel Gage

When the ignitionis on, the fuel gagetells you abouthow much fuel youhave remaining inthe fuel tank.

Here are four things that some owners askabout. None of these indicate a problem withyour fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts offbefore the gage reads full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full,but it actually took a little more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.

• The gage moves a little when you turn acorner or speed up.

• The gage does not go back to empty whenyou turn off the ignition.

When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will seea LOW FUEL message on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 202 for more information.

197

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) displaysinformation such as the trip odometer,personalization features, and warning messages.The DIC display is located on the instrumentpanel cluster.

DIC Controls and DisplaysThe Driver Information Center (DIC) comes onwhen the ignition is on.

If a problem is detected, a warning messageappears on the display. Pressing and releasingthe trip odometer reset stem on the DICacknowledges some current warnings or servicemessages. Some messages only clear afterthe required action has been taken.

The DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stemon the DIC. These modes are explained in thefollowing section. The DIC trip odometer reset stemis located on the instrument panel cluster next tothe DIC display. To scroll through the availablefunctions, press and release the reset stem.

Trip InformationOdometerThe odometer is automatically displayed on theDIC when you start the vehicle. The odometershows the total distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either miles for the United Statesor kilometers for Canada.

Trip OdometerPress and release the reset stem until TRIPappears on the DIC display. The trip odometershows the current distance traveled since the lastreset of the trip odometer in either miles for theUnited States or kilometers for Canada.

To reset the trip odometer, press and hold thereset stem until the display returns to zero.

198

Engine Oil Life SystemWith the engine off, turn the key to ON and thenpress the reset stem until OIL LIFE RESETappears — alternating between OIL LIFE andRESET — on the DIC display. The CHANGE OILmessage alerts you to change your oil on aschedule consistent with your driving conditions.Always reset the OIL LIFE message after anoil change. To reset the message, see EngineOil Life System on page 336.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance is recommendedin the Maintenance Schedule in this manual.See Engine Oil on page 333 and ScheduledMaintenance on page 442 for more information.

LanguageThis feature allows you to choose the languagein which the DIC display shows information.

To set your choice for this feature, perform thefollowing steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the key to ON,but do not start the engine.

2. Close all doors so the DOORS messagedoes not display in the DIC.

3. Momentarily press and release the resetstem until the current language is displayed:English (default), Spanish, or French.

4. To select a different language, press andhold the reset stem until the next languageappears.

5. Repeat Step 4 until the desired language isdisplayed. Once the desired language isshown on the DIC display, the language is set.

6. To exit the language selection, momentarilypress and release the reset stem. All DICmessages will now display in the languageselected.

199

Automatic Door LocksThis feature allows you to program your doorlocks to a preferred setting.

To set your choice for this feature, perform thefollowing steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.Do not remove the key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the power door lock buttonuntil the DIC display shows the currentdoor lock mode.

3. To view the next available mode, press andhold the reset stem until the mode appears.Release the reset stem and press andhold again to view the next mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DICdisplay, briefly press the reset stem to setyour choice. The DIC display then clears.

The following are the available modes:

Lock 1 (default): On vehicles with an automatictransmission, this mode locks all of the doorswhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) andunlocks all of the doors when the vehicle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

On vehicles with a manual transmission, thismode locks all of the doors when the vehiclespeed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) andunlocks all of the doors when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Lock 2: On vehicles with an automatictransmission, this mode locks all of the doorswhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) andunlocks the driver’s door when the vehicle isshifted into PARK (P).

On vehicles with a manual transmission, thismode locks all of the doors when the vehiclespeed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h) andunlocks the driver’s door when the key is removedfrom the ignition.

Lock 3: On vehicles with an automatictransmission, this mode locks all of the doorswhen the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).The doors will not automatically unlock.

On vehicles with a manual transmission, thismode locks all of the doors when the vehiclespeed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).The doors will not automatically unlock.

200

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)FeedbackThis feature allows you to program yourRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) feedback toa preferred setting.

To set your choice for this feature, performthe following steps:

1. With the engine off, turn the key to LOCK.Do not remove the key from the ignition.

2. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttonson the RKE transmitter at the same time.Hold both buttons until the DIC displayshows the current RKE feedback mode.

3. To view the next available mode, press andhold the reset stem until the mode appears.Release the reset stem and press andhold again to view the next mode.

4. Once the desired mode is shown on the DICdisplay, briefly press the reset stem to setyour choice. The DIC display then clears.

The following are the available modes:

RFA 1 (default): This mode flashes the parkinglamps when you press the lock or unlockbuttons on the RKE transmitter.

RFA 2: This mode flashes the parking lamps andsounds the horn when you press the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter. This mode also flashes theparking lamps when you press the unlock buttonon the RKE transmitter.

RFA 3: This mode flashes the parking lampsand sounds the horn when you press the lock orunlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.

RFA 4: This mode disables RKE feedback.There will be no feedback when you press thelock or unlock buttons on the RKE transmitter.

201

DIC Warnings and MessagesMessages are displayed on the DIC to notify thedriver that the status of the vehicle has changedand that some action may be needed by the driverto correct the condition. Multiple messages mayappear one after another. The messages aredisplayed for several seconds each.

Some messages may not require immediateaction, but you should press and release thetrip odometer reset stem to acknowledge that youreceived the messages and to clear them fromthe display. Each message must be acknowledgedindividually.

Some messages cannot be cleared from theDIC display because they are more urgent.These messages require action before theycan be cleared. You should take any messagesthat appear on the display seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages only makes themessages disappear, not correct the problem.

The following are the possible messages that canbe displayed and some information about them.

AC (Air Conditioning) OFFThis message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too high and the air conditioningin your vehicle needs to be turned off. See EngineOverheating on page 348 and Climate ControlSystem on page 177 for more information.This message displays along with the ENG HOTmessage.

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) FAULTThis message displays if there is a problemwith the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Checkthe ABS as soon as possible and have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer. See Brakes onpage 357 and Anti-Lock Brake System WarningLight on page 190 for more information. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

BRAKESThis message displays if there is a problem withthe brakes. Check the brakes as soon as possibleand have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.

202

See Brakes on page 357 and Brake SystemWarning Light on page 189 for more information.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

CHANGE OILThis message displays when the oil needs to bechanged. Check the oil in your vehicle as soonas possible and have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer. See Engine Oil on page 333and Scheduled Maintenance on page 442 formore information. Press and release the resetstem to acknowledge the message and clearit from the display.

DOORSThis message displays when one or more ofthe doors is ajar. Check all the doors on yourvehicle to make sure they are closed. Themessage clears from the display after all ofthe doors are closed.

ENG (Engine) HOTThis message displays when the enginecoolant temperature is hot. Check theengine coolant temperature gage.

See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage onpage 191. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible if you suspectthe engine is overheating. See EngineOverheating on page 348 for more information.

FLUIDThis message displays if the brake fluid is low.Check the brake fluid as soon as possibleand have your vehicle serviced by your dealer.See Brakes on page 357 for more information.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

FUEL CAPThis message displays if the vehicle’s fuel cap iseither off or loose. Pull over as soon as possibleand check to see if the fuel cap is secure. You mayalso see the check engine light on the instrumentpanel cluster. If the check engine light doescome on when the fuel cap was loose, it maytake a few driving trips before the light turns off.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 192for more information if the light still remains on.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

203

LOW FUELThis message displays if the level of fuel inthe vehicle is low. Also check the fuel gage.See Fuel Gage on page 197 for more information.Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.

LOW TIREThis message displays if a low tire pressure isdetected in any of the vehicle’s tires. Press andrelease the reset stem to acknowledge the messageand clear it from the display. The message appearsat each ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to thecorrect inflation pressure. See Tires on page 377and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 384 for moreinformation on tires and the correct inflationpressures.

LOW TRAC (Traction)If your vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when alow traction condition is detected. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253 for moreinformation. Press and release the reset stemto acknowledge the message and clear it fromthe display.

OILThis message displays when the oil pressure islow. See Oil Pressure Light on page 195 andEngine Oil on page 333 for more information.

PARK BRK (Brake)This message displays when the parking brakeis set. See Parking Brake on page 133 andBrake System Warning Light on page 189 formore information. The message clears from thedisplay after the parking brake is released orby pressing and releasing the reset stem.

REDUCED POWERThis message displays when the vehicle’sengine power is reduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is no reductionin performance, proceed to your destination.The performance may be reduced the next timethe vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while this message is on,but acceleration and speed may be reduced.

204

Anytime this message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer for service assoon as possible. Press and release the resetstem to acknowledge the message and clearit from the display.

SERV (Service) 4WD(Four-Wheel Drive)This message displays when there is a problemwith the transfer case control system. Check thetransfer case on your vehicle and have it servicedby your dealer. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 129for more information about the transfer case. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display.

SERV (Service) TPM(Tire Pressure Monitor)This message displays if any of the tire monitorsensors have malfunctioned, if the tire monitorsensors have not been programmed, or ifthe recommended tire pressures are notprogrammed. The tire pressure light also flashesfor one minute and then turns on solid untilthe condition goes away or the system is serviced.

See Tire Pressure Light on page 191. Press andrelease the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display. Thismessage appears at each ignition cycle until thesystem is serviced. See your dealer for service.See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 385 formore information.

SERV (Service) VEH (Vehicle)This message displays if your vehicle needsservice. Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer as soon as possible.

SERVICE CHARG (Charge)SYS (System)This message displays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Under certainconditions, the battery warning light may also turnon in the instrument panel cluster. See BatteryWarning Light on page 188. The battery will not becharging at an optimal rate and the vehicle willlose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode.The vehicle is safe to drive, however havethe electrical system checked by your dealer.Press and release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

205

TRACTION FAULTIf your vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message may display if there isa problem with the TCS. Check the TCS as soonas possible and have your vehicle serviced byyour dealer. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 253 for more information. Press andrelease the reset stem to acknowledge themessage and clear it from the display.

TURN SIGNALThis message displays when the turn signal ison for about 0.75 miles (1.2 km) of travel. Pressand release the reset stem to acknowledgethe message and clear it from the display.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Drivingon page 246. By taking a few moments to readthis manual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort,as well as take advantage of its features.While your vehicle is parked, set up your audiosystem by presetting your favorite radio stations,setting the tone and adjusting the speakers.Then, when driving conditions permit, you cantune to your favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

206

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crashand you or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which youcan help avoid distraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.• Familiarize yourself with its operation.• Set up your audio system by presetting your

favorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer/retailer.Also, check federal rules covering mobile radioand telephone units. If sound equipment canbe added, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere withthe operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio,or other systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere withthe operation of sound equipment thathas been added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functionsof your vehicle operate through the radio/entertainment system. If that equipmentis replaced or additional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimes may not work.Make sure that replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with your vehiclebefore installing it. See Accessories andModifications on page 324.

207

Setting the Time

Radios without Radio DataSystems (RDS)Press and hold HR (hour) until the correcthour displays. Press and hold MIN (minute)until the correct minute displays. There is aninitial two-second delay before the clock goesinto time-set mode. Display the time with theignition off, by pressing RCL (recall), HR,or MIN.

Radios with Radio DataSystems (RDS)The radio could have a button markedwith an H or HR to represent hours andan M or MN to represent minutes.

Press and hold the hour button until thecorrect hour displays. Press and hold theminute button until the correct minute displays.The time can be set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the hour and minutebuttons at the same time until RDS TIME displays.To accept this time, press and hold the hourand minute buttons, at the same time, for anothertwo seconds. If the time is not available fromthe station, NO UPDAT (update) displays.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Aftertuning to an RDS broadcast station, it could takea few minutes for the time to update.

208

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency, band,and the time. When the ignition is off, press thisknob to display the time.

Finding a Station

AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

oSEEK p: Press the SEEK arrows to go to theprevious or to the next station and stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either SEEKarrow for two seconds until a beep sounds. Theradio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station. Press eitherSEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSEEK arrow for more than four seconds untiltwo beeps sound. The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on the pushbuttons, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next preset station.Press either SEEK arrow again to stop scanningpresets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations witha strong signal that are in the selected band.

209

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM)can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns.

5. Repeat Steps 2 through 4 for eachpushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: To adjust bass or treble, press andrelease AUDIO until BAS (bass) or TRE (treble)displays. Then press and hold the wxarrows toincrease or to decrease the tone. If a station isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BAS (bass) or TRE (treble). Then press andhold AUDIO for more than two seconds until abeep sounds. B (balance) and a zero or T (treble)and a zero displays.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first exit outof audio mode by pressing another button,causing the radio to perform that function orwait five seconds for the display to return totime of day. Then press and hold AUDIO formore than two seconds until a beep sounds.CEN (center) displays.

210

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, press and releaseAUDIO until BAL (balance) displays. Then pressand hold the wxarrows to move the soundtoward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and therear speakers, press and release AUDIO untilFAD (fade) displays. Then press and holdthe wxarrows to move the sound toward thefront or the rear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FAD. Then press and holdAUDIO for more than two seconds until a beepsounds. B (balance) and a zero or F (fade) anda zero displays.

To adjust both tone controls and both speakercontrols to the middle position, first exit outof audio mode by pressing another button,causing the radio to perform that function or waitfive seconds for the display to return to time of day.

Then press and hold AUDIO for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds. CEN (center)displays.

Fade might not be available if the vehicle is aregular cab model.

Radio Messages

CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory.If CAL displays it means that the radio has notbeen configured properly for your vehicle and mustbe returned to your dealer/retailer for service.

LOC (Locked): This message is displayedwhen the THEFTLOCK® system has locked up.Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

211

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use onlyon FM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning localand national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases,a radio station could broadcast incorrectinformation that causes the radio features towork improperly. If this happens, contact theradio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

212

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes songtitle and artist name. A service fee is requiredin order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the systemon and off.

o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increaseor to decrease the volume.

DISPL (Display): When the ignition is turned off,press this knob to display the time.

For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change whatdisplays while using RDS. The display optionsare station name, RDS station frequency,PTY (program type), and the name of theprogram (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISPL knobwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISPL knob until you see the desired display,then press and hold this knob for two seconds.The radio produces one beep. The selecteddisplay is now the default.

213

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Automaticvolume automatically adjusts the audio system tomake up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Pressthis button to select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH.AVOL displays. Each higher setting allowsfor more volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then as you drive, automatic volumeincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcomenoise at any speed. The volume level shouldalways sound the same to you as you drive.NONE displays if the radio cannot determine thevehicle speed. To turn automatic volume off,press this button until OFF displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).The selection displays.

o TUNE p: Turn this knob to select radiostations.

q SEEK r: Press the SEEK arrows to go to theprevious or to the next station and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

q SCAN r: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor more than two seconds. SCAN displays andthe radio produces one beep. The radio goes toa station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to thenext station. Press either SCAN arrow again orone of the pushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds.PSCN displays and the radio produces one beep.The radio goes to a preset station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next preset station.Press either SCAN arrow again or one of thepushbuttons to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strongsignal that are in the selected band.

214

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM,or XM1 or XM2.


4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected, is storedfor that pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knobuntil BASS or TREB displays. Turn the knob toincrease or to decrease. The tone display showsthe bass or the treble level. If a station is weakor has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass and the treble to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob.A beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control displays.ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical.

To return the bass and treble to the manualmode, push and release the AUTO EQ buttonuntil CUSTOM displays.

215


AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and releasethe AUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the knob to move the sound toward theright or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knobuntil FADE displays. Turn the knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance or the fade to the middleposition, push the AUDIO knob to select BALor FADE, then push it again and hold it untilone beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY)Station (RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate programtype select mode. TYPE and a PTY displays.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob again, to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays, press theSEEK TYPE button to select and to takeyou to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY,press the SEEK TYPE button twice todisplay the PTY and then go to anotherstation.

5. Press P-TYPE knob to exit program typeselect mode.IF PTY disappears on the display, go backto Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF (traffic) are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected PTYand traffic announcements.

216

If the radio cannot find the desired program type,NONE displays and the radio returns to thelast tuned station.

BAND (AF– Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a stronger stationwith the same program type. To turn alternatefrequency on, press and hold BAND for twoseconds. AF ON displays. The radio could switchto stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.The radio does not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement,even if the volume is low or a CD is playing.If a CD is playing, play stops during theannouncement. Alert announcements cannotbe turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station hasa message, the information symbol displays.Press this button to see the message. Themessage can display the artist, song title,call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts ofthe message displays every three seconds.To scroll through the message, press and releasethe INFO button. A new group of words displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has displayed, the information symboldisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. The lastmessage stays on the display until a new messageis received or the radio is tuned to a differentstation.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO displays.

217

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements.When a traffic announcement is broadcast onthis station you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button andthe radio seeks to a station that does. When astation that broadcasts traffic announcementsis found, the radio stops seeking and TRAFdisplays. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAF displays.

If TRAF displays, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the playof a CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and it must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 240 later inthis section for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING displays.The CD should begin playing. If you want toinsert a CD with the ignition off, first presstheZ(eject) button or the DISPL knob.

218

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that hasbeen recorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, checkthe bottom surface of the CD. If the surface ofthe CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs on page 243 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could getcaught in the CD player. If a CD is recordedon a personal computer and a description labelis needed, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without anylabel, load one CD at a time, and keep theCD player and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” laterin this section.

1 FLD x (Previous): This button is inactivewhen playing a CD.

2 FLD w (Next): This button is inactive whenplaying a CD.

219

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Press and holdthis pushbutton for less than two seconds toreverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.ET (elapsed time) and the elapsed time ofthe track displays.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at six times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 17 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the passage.ET and the elapsed time of the track displays.

6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton tohear the tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM ON displays. RDM and the tracknumber displays when each track starts to play.Press RDM again to turn off random play.RDM OFF displays.

q SEEK r: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current or the previoustrack. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to thestart of the next track. Pressing either SEEKarrow for more than two seconds scans the nexttracks, playing the first eight seconds of eachtrack until all of the tracks have been previewed.Press this button again to stop scanning andto play the track.

oTUNE p: Turning this knob fast tracksreverse or advances through tracks. The tracknumber displays for each track.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. ET and theelapsed time of the track displays. To change thedefault on the display (track or elapsed time),press this knob until you see the desired display,then press and hold the knob for two seconds.The radio produces one beep. The selected displayis now the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

220

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject can be activated with either the ignitionor radio off. CDs can be loaded with the ignitionand radio off if this button is pressed first.

Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have theMP3/WMA feature. If it has this feature, it iscapable of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R disc.For more information on how to play anMP3/WMA CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 234 later in this section.

CD MessagesCHECK CD: If this message displays and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returnsto normal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait aboutan hour and try again.

• The format of the CD might not be compatible.See Using an MP3 on page 234 later inthis section.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

221

Radio with Six-Disc CD

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning localand national emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases,a radio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

222

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes songtitle and artist name. A service fee is requiredin order to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn thesystem on and off.

oVOLUME p: Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

INFO (Information) (XM™ Satellite RadioService and RDS Features): When the ignitionis off, press this knob to display the time.

Press the INFO button to display additional textinformation related to the current FM-RDS or XM™station. A choice of additional information suchas: Channel, Song, Artist, and PTY (program type)may appear. Continue pressing the informationbutton to highlight the desired label, and theinformation about that label displays.

When information is not available, No Infodisplays.

To change the default on the display, press theINFO knob until you see the desired display, thenpress and hold the knob until a beep sounds.The selected display becomes the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as youdrive by increasing the volume as vehicle speedincreases.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium),or MAX. AUTO VOL (maximum automatic volume)displays. Each higher setting provides morevolume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.To turn automatic volume off, press this buttonuntil AUTO VOL OFF displays.

223

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).The selection displays.

oTUNE p: Turn this knob to selectradio stations.

©SEEK ¨: Press either the SEEK or TYPEarrows to go to the previous or to the next stationand stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN orTYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN displaysand a beep sounds. The radio goes to a station,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either the SCAN or TYPE arrowsagain to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either theSCAN or TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.PSC displays and a double beep sounds.

The radio goes to a preset station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next preset station.Press either the SCAN or TYPE arrows again tostop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM,or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set, returns for thatpushbutton.


224

To store an equalization setting to a preset stationperform the following:

1. Tune to the preset station.

2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button toselect the equalization setting.Once the equalization no longer displays,the equalization is set for that preset station.

3. To resave the preset, press and holdthe preset button until a beep sounds.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob untilBASS, MID, or TREB displays. Turn the knobto increase or to decrease. The display shows thebass, midrange, or treble level. If a station isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knob.The radio produces one beep and adjusts thedisplay level to the middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker controls are displayed.ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock,and classical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOEQ button until CUSTOM displays. Then manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, and treble using theAUDIO knob.


AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and release theAUDIO knob until BAL displays. Turn the knobto move the sound toward the right or theleft speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob untilFAD displays. Turn the knob to move the soundtoward the front or the rear speakers.

225

The fade feature might not be available on allradio systems.

To adjust the balance or fade to the middleposition, push and hold the AUDIO knob whileBAL or FAD is displayed. The radio producesone beep and adjusts the display level tothe middle position.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhile no tone or speaker controls are displayed.ALL CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY)Station (RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. P-TYPE and the lastselected PTY displays.

2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and releasethe TYPE button to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, presseither the SEEK or TYPE arrows to selectand to take you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To cancel the seek, press any of the SEEKor TYPE arrows. This also exits the programtype seek mode and returns to the lasttuned station.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, pressand hold either the SEEK or TYPE arrowsfor two seconds, and the radio beginsscanning the stations in the PTY.

4. Press either the SEEK or TYPE arrowsto stop scanning.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BANDfor two seconds. AF ON displays. The radio canswitch to stations with a stronger frequency.

226

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.The radio does not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets.Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the PTY that was set, returns.


RDS Messages

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message could displaythe artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, partsof the message appears every three seconds.To scroll through the message, press and releasethe INFO button. A new group of words displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has displayed, INFO disappears fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button. You can view the last messageuntil a new message is received or a differentstation is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO INFO displays.

227

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays, it means that theradio has not been configured properly forthe vehicle and must be returned to yourdealer/retailer for service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed whenthe THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an errorcannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 240 later inthis section for further detail.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CDin the player, it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.


If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, checkthe bottom surface of the CD. If the surface ofthe CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs on page 243 for more information.


228

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without anylabel, load one CD at a time, and keep theCD player and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into theCD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.To insert one CD, do the following:1. Turn the ignition on.2. Press and release the LOAD button.3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the

right of the slot, to turn green.4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,

label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep sound and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, begins to flash andMULTI LOAD # displays.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,INSERT CD # displays, load a CD. Insertthe CD partway into the slot, label sideup. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the indicator lightbegins flashing again. Once the light stopsflashing and turns green, you can load anotherCD. The CD player takes up to six CDs.Do not try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finishedloading CDs, press the LOAD button to cancelthe loading function. The radio begins to playthe last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, a numberfor each CD displays.

229

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number displays. To playa specific CD, first press the CD AUX button(if not already in CD mode), then press thenumbered pushbutton that corresponds to the CD.A small bar appears under the CD number thatis playing and the track number displays.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” laterin this section.

CDZ (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).

To eject the CD that is currently playing, pressand release this button.

To eject multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Press and hold theZbutton for five seconds.

A beep sounds and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, begins to flash andEJECT ALL displays.

2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD #displays. The CD ejects and can be removed.Once the CD is removed, the indicator lightbegins flashing again and another CD ejects.To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOADor the eject button.

If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player.If CD is pushed back into the player, beforethe 25 second time period is complete, theplayer senses an error and tries to eject theCD several times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button toeject a CD after you have tried to push it inmanually. The player’s 25-second eject timerresets at each press of eject, causing the playerto not eject the CD until the 25-second timeperiod has elapsed.

{REV (Reverse): Press and hold this buttonto reverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. The elapsed timeof the track displays. Release this button to playthe passage.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this buttonto advance quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. The elapsedtime of the track displays. Release this buttonto play the passage.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

230

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. RPT displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.RPT displays. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

RDM (Random): With the random setting,tracks can be listened to in random, rather thansequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release theRDM button. RANDOM ONE displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs thatare loaded in random order, press andhold RDM for more than two seconds.A beep sounds and RANDOM ALL displays.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization settingwhile playing a CD. The equalization is stored

when a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track (if more than10 seconds have played), or to go to the previoustrack (if less than 10 seconds have played).Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track.If either arrow is held or pressed more thanonce, the player continues moving backward orforward through the CD.

©SCAN ¨: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two secondsuntil SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Theradio goes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds,then goes to the next track. Press either SCANarrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds untilCD SCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of the first trackof each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.

231

INFO (Information): Press this knob to see howlong the current track has been playing. To changethe default on the display, track or elapsed time,press the knob until you see the desired display,then press and hold the knob until the radio beeps.The selected display becomes the default.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainsinside the radio for future listening.

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving20 track selections.To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not display.If S-LIST is present, press the SONGLIST button to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use theSEEK or TYPE right arrows to locate thetrack to be saved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button tosave the track into memory. When SONGLIST is pressed, one beep sounds. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressingthe SONG LIST button, two beeps soundto confirm the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save morethan 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.The recorded tracks begins to play in theorder they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEKor TYPE arrows. Seeking past the last savedtrack returns to the first saved track.

232

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn songlist on. S-LIST displays.

3. Press either the SEEK or TYPE arrows toselect the desired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button fortwo seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep sounds. After two seconds ofcontinuously pressing the SONG LIST button,two beeps sound to confirm that the trackhas been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn songlist on. S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button formore than four seconds. One beep sounds,followed by two beeps after two seconds,and a final beep sounds after four seconds.S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating thesong list has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Anytracks saved to the song list again are addedto the bottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST isremoved from the display.

233

CD MessagesCHECK CD: If this message displays and/orthe CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:• It is very hot. When the temperature returns

to normal, the CD should play.• You are driving on a very rough road.

When the road becomes smoother,the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait aboutan hour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Using an MP3MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a

CD-R disc.• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files

on one disc.• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl

extension, other file extensions might not work.• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed

or variable bit rates. Song title, artist name,and album are displayed by the radio whenrecorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easyto find songs while driving. Organize songsby albums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning anMP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It is usuallybetter to burn the disc all at once.

234

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.Long file names, folder names, or playlist namesmay use more disc memory space than necessary.To conserve space on the disc, minimize the lengthof the file, folder, or playlist names. You can alsoplay an MP3 CD-R that was recorded using no filefolders. The system can support up to 11 folders indepth, though, keep the depth of the folders to aminimum in order to keep down the complexityand confusion in trying to locate a particular folderduring playback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are played.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, the directorydisplays as F1 ROOT. All files contained directlyunder the root directory are accessed prior to anyroot directory folders. However, playlists (Px) arealways accessed before root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewherein the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files,the files are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions have no function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all filesare located under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)first and then go to the root folder. When theradio displays the name of the folder, the radiodisplays ROOT.

235

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in thefirst playlist and continues sequentiallythrough all tracks in each playlist. Whenthe last track of the last playlist has played,play continues from the first track of thefirst playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists,then play begins from the first track underthe root directory. When all tracks fromthe root directory have played, play continuesfrom files according to their numericallisting. After playing the last track from thelast folder, play begins again at the first trackof the first folder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the displaydoes not automatically show the new foldername unless you have chosen the folder modeas the default display. See DISPL (display) laterin this section for more information. The newtrack name displays.

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the songname is not present in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters orfour pages are shortened. Parts of words onthe last page of text and the extension ofthe filename does not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists which were created byWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited. These playlists are treated as specialfolders containing compressed audio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING displays.The CD should begin playing and the CD symboldisplays. If you want to insert a CD with theignition off, first press theZbutton or theDISPL knob.

236

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CDin the player it stays in the player. Whenthe ignition or radio is turned on, the CD startsto play where it stopped, if it was the lastselected audio source.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.


If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that hasbeen recorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, checkthe bottom surface of the CD. If the surface ofthe CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly.If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care ofYour CDs on page 243 Care of Your CDs formore information.


Do not add any label to a CD, it could getcaught in the CD player. If a CD is recorded ona personal computer and a description labelis needed, try labeling the top of the recordedCD with a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, useonly CDs in good condition without anylabel, load one CD at a time, and keep theCD player and the loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

1 FLD x (Previous Folder): Press this buttonto go to the first track in the previous folder.Pressing this button while in folder random modetakes you to the previous folder and plays thetracks in random order in that folder.

237

2 FLD w (Next Folder): Press this button togo to the first track in the next folder. Pressingthis button while in folder random mode takesthe CD to the next folder and plays the tracks inrandom order in that folder.

3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. Press and holdthis button for less than two seconds to reverseat 10 times the normal playing speed. Pressand hold it for more than two seconds to reverseat 20 times the normal playing speed. Releasethis button to play the passage. REV and theelapsed time of the track displays.

4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. Press and holdthis button for less than two seconds to advanceat 10 times the normal playing speed. Pressand hold it for more than two seconds to advanceat 20 times the normal playing speed. Releasethis button to play the passage. FWD andthe elapsed time of the track displays.

6 RDM (Random): To play the tracks in randomorder in the current folder or playlist, pressand release this button. FLDR RDM (folderrandom) displays. Once all of the tracks in thecurrent folder or playlist have played, the systemmoves to the next folder or playlist and playsall of the tracks in random order.

To play all the tracks in random order on theCD, press and hold this button for two seconds.A beep sounds and DISC RDM (disc random)displays. This feature does not work with playlists.

When in random, pressing and releasing eitherSEEK arrow takes the CD to the previous or tothe next random track.

Press and release this button again to turn offrandom play. NO RDM (no random) displays.

qSEEK r: Press the left SEEK arrow to goto the start of the previous track. Press theright SEEK arrow to go to the start of the nexttrack. Pressing either SEEK arrow for more thantwo seconds searches the previous or nexttracks at two tracks per second. Release thebutton to stop searching and to play the track.

238

oTUNE p: Turning this knob fast tracksreverse or advances through the tracks in allfolders or playlists. The track number andfile name displays for each track. Turning thisknob while in random fast tracks reverse oradvances the tracks in sequential order.

DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switchbetween track mode, folder/playlist mode, andtime of day mode. The display shows only eightcharacters, but there can be up to four pagesof text. If there are more than eight charactersin the song, folder, or playlist name, pressing thisknob within two seconds takes you to the nextpage of text. If there are no other pages tobe shown, pressing this knob within two secondstakes you to the next display mode.

• Track mode displays the current track numberand the ID3 tag song name.

• Folder/playlist mode displays the current folderor playlist number and the folder/playlist name.

• Time of day mode displays the time of dayand the ID3 tag song name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISPL knob until you see the desired display,then press and hold this knob for two seconds.The radio produces one beep and the selecteddisplay is now the default.

INFO (Information): INFO displays when acurrent track has ID3 tag information. Press thisbutton to display the artist name and albumcontained in the tag. INFO disappears from thedisplay when the information in the ID3 taghas finished being read.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symbolilluminates on the display when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD.Eject can activate while either the ignition orradio is off. CDs can be loaded with the ignitionand radio off if this button is pressed first.

239

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (ExplicitLanguage Channels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signl Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The radio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavl Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

240

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at thistime on this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Lock Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer/retailer.

Radio ID Radio ID label(channel 0)

If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Check XM Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period oftime, the receiver could have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

241

Theft-Deterrent Feature

Non-RDS RadiosTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discouragetheft of your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radiois moved to a different vehicle, it does notoperate and LOC displays.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio doesnot operate if stolen.

RDS RadiosTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN). If the radiois moved to a different vehicle, it does notoperate and LOCKED displays.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, theblinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK®

is armed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio doesnot operate if stolen.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater thanfor FM, especially at night. The longer rangecan cause station frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radio reception, mostAM radio stations will boost the power levelsduring the day, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can also occur whenthings like storms and power lines interfere withradio reception. When this happens, try reducingthe treble on your radio.

242

FM StereoFM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signalswill reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FMsignals, causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standing underheavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnelsmay cause loss of the XM™ signal for a periodof time. The radio may display No Signl toindicate interference.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scansthe bottom surface of the disc. If the surface ofa CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly ornot at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, takea soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface.Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

243

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast isstill tightened to the fender. If tightening isrequired, tighten by hand, then with a wrenchone quarter turn.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clearof snow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get the bestperformance from the XM™ system if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignitionon and the radio power off. The volume levelwill change from the normal level to loud,and LOUD will appear on the radio display.To change back to the default or normal setting,press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volumelevel will change from the loud level to normal,and NORMAL will appear on the radio display.Each time the chime volume is changed,three chimes will sound to indicate the newvolume selected. Removing the radio andnot replacing it with a factory radio or chimemodule will disable vehicle chimes.

244

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 246Defensive Driving ...................................... 246Drunken Driving ........................................ 247Control of a Vehicle .................................. 250Braking ...................................................... 250Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 251Braking in Emergencies ............................. 253Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 253Limited-Slip Rear Axle ............................... 254Steering .................................................... 255Off-Road Recovery .................................... 257Passing ..................................................... 257Loss of Control .......................................... 259Off-Road Driving ........................................ 260Driving at Night ......................................... 276Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 278City Driving ............................................... 281

Freeway Driving ........................................ 282Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 283Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 284Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 284Winter Driving ........................................... 286If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 290Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 291Recovery Hooks ........................................ 292Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 293Truck-Camper Loading Information ............ 299Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ............ 299

Towing ........................................................ 299Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 299Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 300Towing a Trailer ........................................ 306Trailer Recommendations .......................... 320

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

245

Your Driving, the Road,and Your Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 20.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate whatthey might do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common.Allow enough following distance.Defensive driving requires that a driverconcentrate on the driving task. Anythingthat distracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road ina safe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques couldsave your life.

246

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment• Muscular Coordination• Vision• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol,with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.

For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someonewho is drinking depends upon four things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

247

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,

the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Women generallyhave a lower relative percentage of body water thanmen. Since alcohol is carried in body water, thismeans that a woman generally will reach a higherBAC level than a man of her same body weightwill when each has the same number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

But the ability to drive is affected well belowa BAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impairedat a BAC approaching 0.05 percent, and thatthe effects are worse at night. All drivers areimpaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.

248

Statistics show that the chance of being in acollision increases sharply for drivers who have aBAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with aBAC level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or herchance of having a collision. At a BAC level of0.10 percent, the chance of this driver havinga collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street? Aperson with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking anddriving that many people do not know. Medicalresearch shows that alcohol in a person’s systemcan make crash injuries worse, especiallyinjuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart.

This means that when anyone who has beendrinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,that person’s chance of being killed or permanentlydisabled is higher than if the person had notbeen drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking. Ridehome in a cab; or if you are with a group,designate a driver who will not drink.

249

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snowor ice, it is easy to ask more of those controlsystems than the tires and road can provide.That means you can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 324.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 189.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths ofa second. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance inan emergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether itis pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

250

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some peopledrive in spurts — heavy acceleration followedby heavy braking — rather than keeping pacewith traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes maynot have time to cool between hard stops.The brakes will wear out much faster if you doa lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace with thetraffic and allow realistic following distances,you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.That means better braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while youare driving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harderto push down. If the engine stops, you will stillhave some power brake assist. But you will useit when you brake. Once the power assist isused up, it may take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 324.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle has the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), an advanced electronic braking systemthat will help prevent a braking skid.

When you start the engine and begin to driveaway, ABS will check itself. You might heara momentary motor or clicking noise while thistest is going on. This is normal.

If there is a problemwith the ABS, thiswarning light will stayon. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem Warning Lighton page 190.

251

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

252

Remember: ABS does not change the timeyou need to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If youget too close to the vehicle in front of you,you will not have time to apply the brakes if thatvehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leaveenough room up ahead to stop, even thoughyou have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You might feel the brakes vibrate or noticesome noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesWith ABS, you can steer and brake at the sametime. In many emergencies, steering can helpyou more than even the very best braking.

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions.The system operates only if it senses thatone or both of the rear wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system reduces engine power and mayalso upshift the transmission to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working,but this is normal.

The TCS button islocated on yourinstrument panel.Press this buttonto turn the TCSoff and on.

When the traction control system is turned off,an indicator light on the button will illuminate.

253

If your vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow you to safely use it again, you mayre-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Controlon page 166.

TCS operates in all transmission shift leverpositions. But the system can upshift thetransmission only as high as the shift lever positionyou have chosen, so you should use the lowergears only when necessary. See AutomaticTransmission Operation on page 124 and/orManual Transmission Operation on page 126for more information.

If there is a problem with TCS, TRACTION FAULTwill be displayed on your Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 202 for more information.

When this warning is displayed, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave TCS on.But you can turn the system off if you ever need to.You should turn the system off if your vehicleever gets stuck in sand, mud or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicleto Get It Out on page 291 and If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 290 formore information.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 324 for more information.

Limited-Slip Rear AxleIf your vehicle has this feature, your limited-sliprear axle can give you additional traction on snow,mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standardaxle most of the time, but when one of therear wheels has no traction and the other does,this feature will allow the wheel with tractionto move the vehicle.

254

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going inthe same direction. If you have ever tried to steera vehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly accelerate. Both controlsystems — steering and acceleration — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Adding the sudden acceleration can demandtoo much of those places. You can lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Easeup on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehiclethe way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that you shouldadjust your speed. Of course, the posted speedsare based on good weather and road conditions.Under less favorable conditions you will wantto go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 324.

255

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked carsand stops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply the brakes. See Brakingon page 250. It is better to remove as much speedas you can from a possible collision. Then steeraround the problem, to the left or right dependingon the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

256

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder while youare driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightlybelow the pavement, recovery should befairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then,if there is nothing in the way, steer so that yourvehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.

You can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarterturn until the right front tire contacts the pavementedge. Then turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass anotheron a two-lane highway waits for just the rightmoment, accelerates, moves around the vehicleahead, then goes back into the right lane again.A simple maneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

257

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides,and to crossroads for situations that mightaffect your passing patterns. If you have anydoubt whatsoever about making a successfulpass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

258

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatan outside convex mirror makes the vehicleyou just passed seem farther away from youthan it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it might be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy forthe following driver to get ahead of you.Perhaps you can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do whatthe driver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route or areaof less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

259

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. Forsafety, you want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to these conditions. It is important to slowdown on slippery surfaces because stoppingdistance is longer and vehicle control more limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction,try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,or braking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You might not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the roadto make a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)helps avoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingThis off-road guide is for vehicles that havefour-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 250and Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 251.If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive,you should not drive off-road unless you are ona level, solid surface.

260

The airbag system is designed to work properlyunder a wide range of conditions, including off-roadusage. Observe safe driving speeds, especiallyon rough terrain. As always, wear your safety belt.

Off-road driving can be great fun. But it doeshave some definite hazards. The greatest ofthese is the terrain itself.

“Off-roading” means you have left the greatNorth American road system behind. Traffic lanesare not marked. Curves are not banked. Thereare no road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough,uphill, or downhill. In short, you have gone rightback to nature.

Off-road driving involves some new skills. Andthat is why it is very important that you readthis guide. You will find many driving tips andsuggestions. These will help make your off-roaddriving safer and more enjoyable.

Before You Go Off-RoadingThere are some things to do before you go out.For example, be sure to have all necessarymaintenance and service work done. Check tomake sure all underbody shields, if the vehiclehas them, are properly attached. Be sure youread all the information about your four-wheel-drivevehicle in this manual. Is there enough fuel?Is the spare tire fully inflated? Are the fluid levelsup where they should be? What are the locallaws that apply to off-roading where you will bedriving? If you do not know, you should checkwith law enforcement people in the area. Will yoube on someone’s private land? If so, be sureto get the necessary permission.

261

Loading Your Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{CAUTION:

• Cargo on the load floor piled higherthan the seatbacks can be thrownforward during a sudden stop. Youor your passengers could be injured.Keep cargo below the top of theseatbacks.

• Unsecured cargo on the load floorcan be tossed about when drivingover rough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck by flyingobjects. Secure the cargo properly.

• Heavy loads on the roof raise thevehicle’s center of gravity, makingit more likely to roll over. You canbe seriously or fatally injured if the



vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not on the roof.Keep cargo in the cargo area as farforward and low as possible.

There are some important things to rememberabout how to load your vehicle.

• The heaviest things should be on the loadfloor and forward of the rear axle. Putheavier items as far forward as you can.

• Be sure the load is secured properly, sodriving on the off-road terrain does nottoss things around.

You will find other important information in thismanual. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293and Tires on page 377.

262

Environmental ConcernsOff-road driving can provide wholesome andsatisfying recreation. However, it also raisesenvironmental concerns. We recognize theseconcerns and urge every off-roader to followthese basic rules for protecting the environment:

• Always use established trails, roads, and areasthat have been specially set aside for publicoff-road recreational driving; obey all postedregulations.

• Avoid any driving practice that could damagethe environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,grasses — or disturb wildlife. This includeswheel-spinning, breaking down trees, orunnecessary driving through streams orover soft ground.

• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuseis removed from any campsite before leaving.

• Take extreme care with open fires wherepermitted, camp stoves, and lanterns.

• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or othercombustible materials that could catch fire fromthe heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.

Traveling to Remote AreasIt makes sense to plan your trip, especially whengoing to a remote area. Know the terrain andplan your route. You are much less likely toget bad surprises. Get accurate maps of trailsand terrain. Try to learn of any blocked orclosed roads.

It is also a good idea to travel with at leastone other vehicle. If something happens toone of them, the other can help quickly.

Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sureto read the winch instructions. In a remote area,a winch can be handy if you get stuck. But youwill want to know how to use it properly.

263

Getting Familiar with Off-Road DrivingIt is a good idea to practice in an area that issafe and close to home before you go into thewilderness. Off-road driving does require somenew and different skills. Here is what we mean.

Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweepthe terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your earsneed to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds.With your arms, hands, feet, and body, you willneed to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.

Controlling your vehicle is the key to successfuloff-road driving. One of the best ways to controlyour vehicle is to control your speed. Here aresome things to keep in mind. At higher speeds:

• You approach things faster and you haveless time to scan the terrain for obstacles.

• You have less time to react.

• You have more vehicle bounce when youdrive over obstacles.

• You will need more distance for braking,especially since you are on an unpavedsurface.

{CAUTION:

When you are driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in direction can easilythrow you out of position. This could causeyou to lose control and crash. So, whetheryou are driving on or off the road, you andyour passengers should wear safety belts.

Scanning the TerrainOff-road driving can take you over many differentkinds of terrain. You need to be familiar withthe terrain and its many different features.Here are some things to consider.

Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take youover hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,mud, snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces affectsthe steering, acceleration, and braking of yourvehicle in different ways. Depending upon the kindof surface you are on, you may experience slipping,sliding, wheel spinning, delayed acceleration,poor traction, and longer braking distances.

264

Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstaclescan be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, orbump can startle you if you are not preparedfor them. Often these obstacles are hiddenby grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise andfall of the terrain itself. Here are some thingsto consider:

• Is the path ahead clear?

• Will the surface texture change abruptlyup ahead?

• Does the travel take you uphill ordownhill? There is more discussion ofthese subjects later.

• Will you have to stop suddenly or changedirection quickly?

When you drive over obstacles or roughterrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel.Ruts, troughs, or other surface features canjerk the wheel out of your hands if you arenot prepared.

When you drive over bumps, rocks, or otherobstacles, the wheels can leave the ground.If this happens, even with one or two wheels,you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all.

Because you will be on an unpaved surface,it is especially important to avoid suddenacceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking.

In a way, off-road driving requires a differentkind of alertness from driving on paved roadsand highways. There are no road signs, postedspeed limits, or signal lights. You have to useyour own good judgment about what is safe andwhat is not.

Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on anyroad. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.At the very time you need special alertness anddriving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, andjudgment can be affected by even a small amountof alcohol. You could have a serious — or evenfatal — accident if you drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking. See DrunkenDriving on page 247.

265

Driving on Off-Road HillsOff-road driving often takes you up, down, oracross a hill. Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding of what yourvehicle can and cannot do. There are some hillsthat simply cannot be driven, no matter howwell built the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Many hills are simply too steep for anyvehicle. If you drive up them, you willstall. If you drive down them, you cannotcontrol your speed. If you drive acrossthem, you will roll over. You could beseriously injured or killed. If you haveany doubt about the steepness, do notdrive the hill.

Approaching a HillWhen you approach a hill, you need to decideif it is one of those hills that is just too steepto climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can behard to judge. On a very small hill, for example,there may be a smooth, constant incline withonly a small change in elevation where you caneasily see all the way to the top. On a largehill, the incline may get steeper as you near thetop, but you may not see this because the crestof the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.

Here are some other things to consider asyou approach a hill.

• Is there a constant incline, or does the hillget sharply steeper in places?

• Is there good traction on the hillside, or willthe surface cause tire slipping?

• Is there a straight path up or down the hill soyou will not have to make turning maneuvers?

• Are there obstructions on the hill that canblock your path, such as boulders, trees,logs, or ruts?

266

• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff,an embankment, a drop-off, a fence?Get out and walk the hill if you do not know.It is the smart way to find out.

• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills oftenhave ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposedrocks because they are more susceptibleto the effects of erosion.

Driving UphillOnce you decide you can safely drive up thehill, you need to take some special steps.

• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on thesteering wheel.

• Get a smooth start up the hill and try tomaintain your speed. Do not use more powerthan you need, because you do not wantthe wheels to start spinning or sliding.

{CAUTION:

Turning or driving across steep hills canbe dangerous. You could lose traction,slide sideways, and possibly roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.When driving up hills, always try to gostraight up.

• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.If the path twists and turns, you might want tofind another route.

• Ease up on your speed as you approach thetop of the hill.

• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you morevisible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.

267

• Sound the horn as you approach the topof the hill to let opposing traffic know youare there.

• Use your headlamps even during the day.They make your vehicle more visible tooncoming traffic.

{CAUTION:

Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at fullspeed can cause an accident. There couldbe a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could be seriouslyinjured or killed. As you near the topof a hill, slow down and stay alert.

Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls,or is about to stall, and I cannot makeit up the hill?

A: If this happens, there are some things youshould do, and there are some things youmust not do. First, here is what you should do:

• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicleand keep it from rolling backwards. Also,apply the parking brake.

• If your engine is still running, shift thetransmission to REVERSE (R), release theparking brake, and slowly back down thehill in REVERSE (R).

• If your engine has stopped running, you willneed to restart it. With the brake pedalpressed and the parking brake still applied,shift the transmission to PARK (P), or shiftto NEUTRAL if your vehicle has a manualtransmission, and restart the engine. Then,shift to REVERSE (R), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back down the hill asstraight as possible in REVERSE (R).

268

• As you are backing down the hill, put your lefthand on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clockposition. This way, you will be able to tell if thewheels are straight and maneuver as youback down. It is best that you back down thehill with the wheels straight rather than inthe left or right direction. Turning the wheeltoo far to the left or right will increase thepossibility of a rollover.

Here are some things you must not do if you stall,or are about to stall, when going up a hill.

• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shiftinginto NEUTRAL (N), or pressing the clutchif your vehicle has a manual transmission,to rev-up the engine and regain forwardmomentum. This will not work. Your vehiclewill roll backwards very quickly and youcould go out of control.Instead, apply the regular brake to stopthe vehicle. Then apply the parking brake.Shift to REVERSE (R), release the parkingbrake, and slowly back straight down.

• Never attempt to turn around if you are aboutto stall when going up a hill. If the hill issteep enough to stall your vehicle, it is steepenough to cause you to roll over if youturn around. If you cannot make it up thehill, you must back straight down the hill.

Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to backdown the hill and decide I just cannotdo it. What should I do?

A: Set the parking brake, put the automatictransmission in PARK (P), or the manualtransmission in FIRST (1), and turn offthe engine. Leave the vehicle and go getsome help. Exit on the uphill side andstay clear of the path the vehicle wouldtake if it rolled downhill.

269

Driving DownhillWhen off-roading takes you downhill, you willwant to consider a number of things:

• How steep is the downhill? Will I be ableto maintain vehicle control?

• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?

• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts?Logs? Boulders?

• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there ahidden creek bank or even a river bottomwith large rocks?

If you decide you can go down a hill safely, thentry to keep your vehicle headed straight down,and use a low gear. This way, engine dragcan help the brakes and they will not have todo all the work. Descend slowly, keepingyour vehicle under control at all times.

{CAUTION:

Heavy braking when going down a hill cancause your brakes to overheat and fade.This could cause loss of control and aserious accident. Apply the brakes lightlywhen descending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed under control.

270

Q: Are there some things I should not dowhen driving down a hill?

A: Yes! These are important because if youignore them you could lose control andhave a serious accident.

• When driving downhill, avoid turns that takeyou across the incline of the hill. A hill thatis not too steep to drive down may betoo steep to drive across. You could rollover if you do not drive straight down.

• Never go downhill with the transmission inNEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedalpressed down with a manual transmission.This is called “free-wheeling.” The brakes willhave to do all the work and could overheatand fade.

Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?

A: It is much more likely to happen goinguphill. But if it happens going downhill,here is what to do.

1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regularbrakes. Apply the parking brake.

2. Shift to PARK (P), or to NEUTRAL with themanual transmission, and, while still braking,restart the engine.

3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parkingbrake, and drive straight down.

4. If the engine will not start, get out andget help.

271

Driving Across an InclineSooner or later, an off-road trail will probablygo across the incline of a hill. If this happens,you have to decide whether to try to drive acrossthe incline. Here are some things to consider:

{CAUTION:

Driving across an incline that is toosteep will make your vehicle roll over.You could be seriously injured or killed.If you have any doubt about thesteepness of the incline, do not driveacross it. Find another route instead.

• A hill that can be driven straight up or downmay be too steep to drive across. When yougo straight up or down a hill, the length of thewheel base — the distance from the frontwheels to the rear wheels — reduces thelikelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end.

But when you drive across an incline, themuch more narrow track width — the distancebetween the left and right wheels — may notprevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.Also, driving across an incline puts more weighton the downhill wheels. This could cause adownhill slide or a rollover.

• Surface conditions can be a problem whenyou drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass can cause yourtires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicleslips sideways, it can hit something that willtrip it — a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.

• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness ofthe incline even worse. If you drive across arock with the uphill wheels, or if the downhillwheels drop into a rut or depression, yourvehicle can tilt even more.

For reasons like these, you need to decidecarefully whether to try to drive across an incline.Just because the trail goes across the inclinedoes not mean you have to drive it. The lastvehicle to try it might have rolled over.

272

Q: What if I am driving across an inclinethat is not too steep, but I hit someloose gravel and start to slide downhill.What should I do?

A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slidesideways, turn downhill. This should helpstraighten out the vehicle and preventthe side slipping. However, a much betterway to prevent this is to get out and“walk the course” so you know what thesurface is like before you drive it.

Stalling on an Incline

{CAUTION:

Getting out on the downhill (low) sideof a vehicle stopped across an incline isdangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, youcould be crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill (high) side of the vehicleand stay well clear of the rollover path.

If your vehicle stalls when you are crossingan incline, be sure you, and any passengers,get out on the uphill side, even if the door thereis harder to open. If you get out on the downhillside and the vehicle starts to roll over, you willbe right in its path.

If you have to walk down the slope, stay out ofthe path the vehicle will take if it does roll over.

273

Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or IceWhen you drive in mud, snow, or sand, yourwheels will not get good traction. You cannotaccelerate as quickly, turning is more difficult,and you will need longer braking distances.

It is best to use a low gear when you are inmud — the deeper the mud, the lower the gear.In really deep mud, the idea is to keep yourvehicle moving so you do not get stuck.

When you drive on sand, you will sense a changein wheel traction. But it will depend upon howloosely packed the sand is. On loosely packedsand, such as on beaches or sand dunes,your tires will tend to sink into the sand. This hasan effect on steering, accelerating, and braking.Drive at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turnsor abrupt maneuvers.

Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tiretraction. On these surfaces, it is very easy to losecontrol. On wet ice, for example, the traction isso poor that you will have difficulty accelerating.And if you do get moving, poor steering anddifficult braking can cause you to slide outof control.

{CAUTION:

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or riverscan be dangerous. Underwater springs,currents under the ice, or sudden thawscan weaken the ice. Your vehicle couldfall through the ice and you and yourpassengers could drown. Drive yourvehicle on safe surfaces only.

274

Driving in Water

{CAUTION:

Driving through rushing water can bedangerous. Deep water can sweep yourvehicle downstream and you and yourpassengers could drown. If it is onlyshallow water, it can still wash away theground from under your tires, and youcould lose traction and roll the vehicleover. Do not drive through rushing water.

Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and floodwaters demand extreme caution.

Find out how deep the water is before youdrive through it. If it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe, do nottry it — you probably will not get through.Also, water that deep can damage the axleand other vehicle parts.

If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.At faster speeds, water splashes on the ignitionsystem and your vehicle can stall. Stalling canalso occur if you get the tailpipe under water.And, as long as the tailpipe is under water, youwill never be able to start the engine. When yougo through water, remember that when the brakesget wet, it may take you longer to stop.

See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 278for more information on driving through water.

275

After Off-Road DrivingRemove any brush or debris that has collectedon the underbody, chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand, have the brakelinings cleaned and checked. These substancescan cause glazing and uneven braking. Checkthe body structure, steering, suspension,wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage.Also, check the fuel lines and cooling systemfor any leakage.

Your vehicle will require more frequent servicedue to off-road use. Refer to the maintenanceschedule for additional information.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reducethe glare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, slow downand keep more space between you andother vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up onlyso much road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

276

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They might cut downon glare from headlamps, but they also makea lot of things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at nightis made much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far lessof a roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easierto pick out dimly lighted objects. Just as theheadlamps should be checked regularly for properaim, so should your eyes be examined regularly.Some drivers suffer from night blindness — theinability to see in dim light — and are not evenaware of it.

277

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate,or turn as well because your tire-to-roadtraction is not as good as on dry roads.

And, if your tires do not have much tread left,you will get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fallwhile you are driving. The surface may get wetsuddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your wiping equipment ingood shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

278

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try toslow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if the pressurein one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of wateris standing on the road. If you can see reflectionsfrom trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles,and raindrops dimple the water’s surface, therecould be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can comein through the engine’s air intake and badlydamage the engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

279

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. If you try to drive throughflowing water, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwisebe very cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not

just your parking lamps — to help makeyou more visible to others.

• Besides slowing down, allow some extrafollowing distance. And be especiallycareful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself more clear room ahead,and be prepared to have your viewrestricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 377.

280

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streetsis the amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers aredoing and pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety incity driving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 282.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

281

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Driveat the same speed most of the other drivers aredriving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks asmooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freewayas a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed tothe posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

282

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move tothe proper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stopand back up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted.

Reduce your speed according to yourspeedometer, not to your sense of motion.After driving for any distance at higher speeds,you may tend to think you are going slowerthan you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey.Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you caneasily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealrships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you

checked all levels?• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the

lenses clean?• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,

trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should you delayyour trip a short time to avoid a major stormsystem?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

283

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep atthe wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,

with a comfortably cool interior.• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road

ahead and to the sides. Check your vehicle’smirrors and instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap,get some exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

284

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if youare planning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.See Off-Road Driving on page 260 for informationabout driving off-road.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transmission. Theseparts can work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would thenhave poor braking or even none goingdown a hill. You could crash. Alwayshave the engine running and your vehiclein gear when you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do someof the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

285

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You might see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 377.

286

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag,some winter outer clothing, a small shovel, aflashlight, a red cloth, and a couple of reflectivewarning triangles. And, if you will be driving undersevere conditions, include a small bag of sand,a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bagsto help provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, orgrip, and will need to be very careful. What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold

snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. Butwet ice can be even more trouble because it mayoffer the least traction of all. You can get wet icewhen it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezingrain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet iceuntil salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

287

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. See Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 251.

• Allow greater following distance on anyslippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road mightbe fine until you hit a spot that is coveredwith ice. On an otherwise clear road, icepatches may appear in shaded areas wherethe sun cannot reach, such as around clumpsof trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while youare actually on the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you couldbe in a serious situation. You should probablystay with your vehicle unless you know forsure that you are near help and you can hikethrough the snow. Here are some things to doto summon help and keep yourself and yourpassengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulatorsfrom newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

288

You can run the engine to keep warm,but be careful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases underyour vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the sideof the vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

289

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make itgo a little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do itas little as possible. Preserve the fuel as longas you can. To help keep warm, you can getout of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorousexercises every half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin the wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out whenyou are stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin athigh speed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. And, thevehicle can overheat. That could causean engine compartment fire or otherdamage. When you are stuck, spin thewheels as little as possible. Do not spinthe wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

290

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroyparts of your vehicle as well as the tires.If you spin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transmission back and forth, you candestroy the transmission.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 398.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right to clearthe area around the front wheels. For four-wheeldrive vehicles, shift into 4HI. For vehicles withtraction control, turn the system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 253. Then shift backand forth between REVERSE (R) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission, betweenFIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),spinning the wheels as little as possible.

To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheelsstop spinning before shifting gears. Release theaccelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal when the transmission is ingear. By slowly spinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions, you will cause a rockingmotion that could free your vehicle. If that does notget your vehicle out after a few tries, it might needto be towed out. Or, you can use the recoveryhooks, if your vehicle has them. If your vehicle doesneed to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicleon page 299.

291

Recovery Hooks

{CAUTION:

These hooks, when used, are under a lot offorce. Always pull the vehicle straight out.Never pull on the hooks at a sidewaysangle. The hooks could break off and youor others could be injured from the chainor cable snapping back.

Notice: Never use recovery hooks to towthe vehicle. Your vehicle could be damagedand it would not be covered by warranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front ofthe vehicle, you can use them if you are stuckoff-road and need to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

292

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehiclecapacity weight and includes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry, the Tire and LoadingInformation label and the Certification/Tire label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rearGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If youdo, parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you willfind the label attached below the door latch post.Vehicle’s without a center pillar, like extendedcab models, will have the Tire and LoadingInformation label attached to the driver’s sideextended cab door, above the door latch post.The Tire and Loading Information label showsthe number of occupant seating positions (A),and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B)in kilograms and pounds.

Label Example

293

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 377 and Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 384.

There is also important information on theCertification/Tire label. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label” laterin this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined weight

of occupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amountof available cargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.See Towing a Trailer on page 306 forimportant information on towing a trailer,towing safety, and trailering tips.

294

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) x 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 700 lbs (317 kg)




750 lbs (340 kg)


Example 1 Example 2

295




1,000 lbs (453 kg)


Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’scapacity weight and seating positions. Thecombined weight of the driver, passengers, cargo,and any accessories or equipment added toyour vehicle after it left the factory should neverexceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attachedto the bottom section of the center pillar, on thedriver’s side of the vehicle. Vehicles without acenter pillar, like extended cab models, will havethe Certification/Tire label attached to the edge ofthe driver’s side, extended cab door, below the doorlatch post. The label shows the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes theweight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, cargo,and trailer tongue weight, if pulling a trailer.

Example 3

Label Example

296

The Certification/Tire label also tells you themaximum weights for the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).To find out the actual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to a weigh station andweigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help youwith this. Be sure to spread out your load equallyon both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or theGAWR for either the front or rear axle.

If you do have a heavy load, you should spreadit out.

Similar appearing vehicles may have differentGVWRs and capacity weights. Please noteyour vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or consultyour dealer for additional details.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Using heavier suspension components to getadded durability might not change your weightratings. Ask your dealer to help you loadyour vehicle the right way.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

297

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if thereis a crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a suddenstop or turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the cargo area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the topsof the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

There is also important loading information foroff-road driving in this manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-RoadDriving on page 260.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weightrating (GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

Two-Tiered LoadingBy positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks acrossthe width of the pickup box, you can create anupper load platform. The planks must be insertedin the pickup box depressions. The length ofthe planks must allow for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm)bearing surface on each end of the plank.

When using this upper load platform, be sure theload is securely tied down to prevent it fromshifting. The load’s center of gravity should bepositioned in a zone over the rear axle.

Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’staillamp area must be properly marked accordingto local laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

298

Add-On EquipmentWhen you carry removable items, you may needto put a limit on how many people you carryinside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install the new equipment.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) of the rear axle.

A reinforcement kit for mounting a toolbox isrecommended. See your dealer.

Truck-Camper Loading InformationYour vehicle was not designed to carry aslide-in camper.

Pickup Conversion to Chassis CabGeneral Motors is aware that some vehicleowners may consider having the pickup boxremoved and a commercial or recreationalbody installed. However, we recommend thatconversions of this type not be done to pickups.Owners should be aware that, as manufactured,there are differences between a chassis caband a pickup with the box removed which mayaffect vehicle safety.

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer/retailer or a professionaltowing service if you need to have your disabledvehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Programon page 466.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such asbehind a motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

299

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle — such as behinda motorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy”(towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground) and “dolly” (towing your vehicle withtwo wheels on the ground and two wheels upon a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment,many vehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.

Here are some important things to considerbefore you do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer/retailer or traileringprofessional for additional advice andequipment recommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicleis prepared to be towed.

Dinghy TowingTwo-Wheel Drive VehiclesNotice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not betowed with all four wheels on the ground.Two-wheel-drive transmissions have noprovisions for internal lubrication whilebeing towed.

300

Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Drive the vehicle to be towed into positionbehind the tow vehicle.

2. Firmly set the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 133 for more information.

3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P)or a manual transmission in FIRST (1).

4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed tothe tow vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’stransfer case into NEUTRAL cancause your vehicle to roll even if thetransmission is in PARK (P) for anautomatic transmission, or if your vehicleis in gear, for a manual transmission.You or others could be injured. Makesure the parking brake is firmly set beforeyou shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.

5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.See Four-Wheel Drive on page 129 formore information.

301

6. Release the parking brake only after thevehicle being towed is firmly attached tothe tow vehicle.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK.If the tow vehicle will not be started or drivenfor six weeks or more, remove the batterycable from the negative terminal (post) of thebattery to prevent your battery from drainingwhile towing.

After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL”under Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.

Dolly TowingFront Towing(Front Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive VehiclesNotice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith the rear wheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Never tow your vehicle with the rear wheelson the ground.Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed withthe rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisions for internal

lubrication while being towed. To dolly tow atwo-wheel-drive vehicle, you must tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear Towing(Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this sectionfor more information.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to dolly tow yourvehicle from the front:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.


302


4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle.

{CAUTION:





After towing see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL”under Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.

303

Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehiclefrom the rear:

1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.



4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions toattach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle. Make sure the wheels are straightbefore towing.For manual transmission vehicles, make surethe wheels are straight before proceedingto the next steps. On automatic transmissionvehicles, use an adequate clamping deviceto ensure that the front wheels are locked intothe straight position.



304

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Use the following procedure to tow your vehiclefrom the rear:1. Drive the vehicle onto the dolly.2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking

Brake on page 133 for more information.3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P)

or a manual transmission in FIRST (1).4. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to

attach and secure the vehicle being towed tothe dolly and then the loaded dolly to thetow vehicle.

For manual transmission vehicles, make surethe wheels are straight before proceedingto the next steps. On automatic transmissionvehicles, use an adequate clamping deviceto ensure that the front wheels are lockedinto the straight position.

{CAUTION:



305



After towing, see “Shifting Out of NEUTRAL”under Four-Wheel Drive on page 129.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer/retailer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

306

Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly candamage your vehicle and result in costlyrepairs that would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always follow the instructions inthis section and check with your dealer/retailerfor more information about towing a trailerwith your vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,you should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer” that appears later in this section.

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can aska hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first500 miles (800 km) your new vehicle is driven.Your engine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

307

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km)that you tow a trailer, don’t drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and don’t make startsat full throttle. This helps your engine andother parts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

• You may want to shift the transmission toTHIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gearselection if the transmission shifts toooften (e.g., under heavy loads and/or hillyconditions). If you have a manual transmissionand you are towing a trailer, it’s better notto use the highest gear.

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• the weight of the trailer,

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weightthe vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it hasall the required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengersand cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

308

The following charts show how much your trailer can weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.

2WD Regular Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Automatic Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 3,300 lbs (1 497 kg) 7,000 lbs (3 175 kg)


Manual Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 2,300 lbs (1 043 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle shouldnot be exceeded.

2WD Regular CabMid-Box Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*



Manual Transmission,2.9L Engine 3.73 2,200 lbs (997 kg) 6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)


309

2WD Extended Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*





2WD Crew Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*





310

4WD Regular Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*







311

4WD Extended Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*







4WD Crew Cab Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*



Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or advice, or you can write us at ourCustomer Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance Offices on page 464 for more information.

312

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.And if you will tow a trailer, you must addthe tongue load to the GVW because your vehiclewill be carrying that weight, too. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 293 for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percentto 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight,up to a maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weightcarrying hitch.

Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongueweight for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitch ball closestto the vehicle. This will help reduce the effectof trailer tongue weight on the rear axle.

313

After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they aren’t you may be ableto get them right simply by moving some of theitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s abilityto carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannotcause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (RearGross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additionalweight may reduce your trailering capacitymore than the total of the additional weight.

Consider the following example:

A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the frontaxle and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle.It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), aRGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and aGCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)of 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

The trailer rating should be:

You can expect tongue weight to be at least10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) andbecause the weight is applied well behind therear axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greaterthan just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 timesas much. The weight at the rear axle couldbe 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs(1 225 kg), adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings thetotal to 3,975 lbs (1 803 kg). This is very close to,but within the limit for RGAWR as well. Thevehicle is set to trailer up to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).

But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped withsome of the latest options and you have a frontseat passenger and two rear seat passengerswith some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.

314

You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front axleweight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight.Your vehicle now weighs:

Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and youmay think that you should subtract 700 additionalpounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity tostay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailerwould only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may gofurther and think you must limit tongue weight toless than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceedingGVWR. But, you must still consider the effecton the rear axle. Because your rear axle nowweighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without exceedingRGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able tohandle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.

Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percentof total loaded trailer weight, you can expect thatthe largest trailer your vehicle can properly handleis 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).

It is important that you make sure your vehicledoes not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating orTongue Weight. The only way to be sure you arenot exceeding any of these ratings is to weighyour vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on theCertification/Tire label located at the bottom of thecenter pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle, orsee Loading Your Vehicle on page 293. Then besure you don’t go over the GVWR limit for yourvehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roadsare a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.

315

Weight-Distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying HitchesYou can use your step bumper hitch for trailersup to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and200 lbs (90 kg) tongue weight.

Notice: If you use a step-bumper hitch, yourbumper could be damaged in sharp turns.Make sure you have ample room when turningto avoid contact between the trailer andthe bumper.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chainsunder the tongue of the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. For trailers up to2,000 lbs (907 kg) you may attach the safety chainsto the attaching points on the bumper. For heaviertrailers, follow the trailer or hitch manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chains.Always leave just enough slack so you can turnwith your rig. Never allow safety chains to dragon the ground.

Trailer BrakesIf your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)loaded, then it needs its own brakes — and theymust be adequate. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for the trailer brakes so you’ll be ableto install, adjust and maintain them properly.

Your trailer’s brake system can tap into thevehicle’s hydraulic brake system only if:

• The trailer parts can withstand3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure.

• The trailer’s brake system will use lessthan 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid fromyour vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise,both braking systems won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes.

If everything checks out this far, then make thebrake fluid tap at the port on the master cylinderthat sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’tuse copper tubing for this. If you do, it will bendand finally break off. Use steel brake tubing.

316

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and brakingwith the added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are drivingis now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start your vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps andany trailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,just move that hand to the left. To move thetrailer to the right, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and, if possible, havesomeone guide you.

317

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.

When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turnsthan normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal wellin advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to haveextra wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher.

The arrows on your instrument panel will flashwhenever you signal a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will alsoflash, telling other drivers you’re about toturn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even ifthe bulbs on the trailer are burned out.

Thus, you may think drivers behind you are seeingyour signal when they are not. It’s important tocheck occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs arestill working.

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade.If you don’t shift down, you might have to useyour brakes so much that they would get hotand no longer work well.

When towing at high altitude on steep uphillgrades, consider the following: Engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If you turn your engine off immediatelyafter towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,your vehicle may show signs similar to engineoverheating. To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked (preferably on level ground) withthe automatic transmission in PARK (P) (orthe manual transmission out of gear and theparking brake applied) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If you do get the overheatwarning, see Engine Overheating on page 348.

318

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured,and both your vehicle and the trailercan be damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into

PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manualtransmission. When parking uphill, turn yourwheels away from the curb. When parkingdownhill, turn your wheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place,release the regular brakes until thechocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake, and then shift into PARK (P),or REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission.See Parking Brake on page 133 for moreinformation.

5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, besure the transfer case is in a drive gearand not in NEUTRAL. See Four-WheelDrive on page 129 for more information.

6. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to LeaveAfter Parking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the

pedal down while you:• start your engine,• shift into a gear, and• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clearof the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up andstore the chocks.

319

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more oftenwhen you’re pulling a trailer. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 442 for more on this.Things that are especially important in traileroperation are automatic transmission fluid(don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,cooling system and brake system. Each of theseis covered in this manual, and the Index willhelp you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,it’s a good idea to review these sections beforeyou start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nutsand bolts are tight.

Trailer Wiring HarnessYour vehicle may be equipped with a four-pintrailer towing harness. This harness has a four-pintrailer connector that is attached to a bracket onthe hitch platform. The four-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:

• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal• Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal• Brown: Taillamps/Park lamps• White: Ground

Trailer RecommendationsYou must subtract your hitch load from the CWRfor your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailerattached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR orthe GAWR.

You’ll get the best performance if you spreadout the weight of your load the right way, and ifyou choose the correct hitch and trailer brakes.

For more information, see Towing a Traileron page 306 later in this section.

320

Service ........................................................ 324Accessories and Modifications ................... 324California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 324Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 325Adding Equipment to the

Outside of Your Vehicle ......................... 325Fuel ............................................................. 326

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 326Gasoline Specifications .............................. 326California Fuel ........................................... 326Additives ................................................... 326Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 327Filling the Tank ......................................... 328Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 330

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 331Hood Release ........................................... 331Engine Compartment Overview .................. 332Engine Oil ................................................. 333Engine Oil Life System .............................. 336

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 338Automatic Transmission Fluid .................... 339Manual Transmission Fluid ........................ 342Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 344Engine Coolant .......................................... 345Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 348Engine Overheating ................................... 348Cooling System ......................................... 350Engine Fan Noise ..................................... 355Power Steering Fluid ................................. 355Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 356Brakes ...................................................... 357Battery ...................................................... 361Jump Starting ............................................ 362

Rear Axle .................................................... 368Four-Wheel Drive ........................................ 368Front Axle ................................................... 369

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

321

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 370Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 370Headlamps ................................................ 371Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .............. 372Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ................................ 372Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps ............................... 373License Plate Lamp ................................... 374Replacement Bulbs ................................... 374

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 375Tires ............................................................ 377

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 378Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 381Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 384Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 385

Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 390When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 391Buying New Tires ...................................... 392Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 394Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 395Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 396Wheel Replacement .................................. 396Tire Chains ............................................... 398If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 399Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 400Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 401Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 404Secondary Latch System ........................... 412Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and Tools .............................................. 416Spare Tire ................................................. 420


322

Appearance Care ........................................ 422Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 422Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 423Leather ...................................................... 424Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 425Care of Safety Belts .................................. 425Weatherstrips ............................................ 425Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 426Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 426Finish Care ............................................... 426Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 427Aluminum or Chrome-Plated

Wheels and Trim ................................... 428Tires ......................................................... 429

Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 429Finish Damage .......................................... 429Underbody Maintenance ............................ 430Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 430Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 431

Vehicle Identification .................................. 432Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 432Service Parts Identification Label ............... 432

Electrical System ........................................ 432Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 432Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 433Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 433Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 433

Capacities and Specifications .................... 437


323

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will go toyour dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may even causemalfunction or damage not covered by warranty.GM Accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine GM Accessories. Whenyou go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask for GMAccessories, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service technicians will perform thework using genuine GM Accessories.

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, manyparts and systems (including some inside thevehicle), many fluids, and some component wearby-products contain and/or emit these chemicals.

324

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attemptany vehicle maintenance task.

• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English and metricfasteners can be easily confused. If youuse the wrong fasteners, parts can laterbreak or fall off. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to serviceyour vehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 476.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 94.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 456.

Adding Equipment to theOutside of Your VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

325

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an importantpart of the proper maintenance of your vehicle.To help keep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, GM recommendsthe use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating isless than 87, you might notice an audible knockingnoise when you drive, commonly referred to asspark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If you areusing gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and youhear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolinesmay contain an octane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). General Motors recommendsagainst the use of gasolines containing MMT. SeeAdditives on page 326 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operateon fuels that meet California specifications.See the underhood emission control label.If this fuel is not available in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 192. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not be coveredby your warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly.

326

In most cases, you should not have to addanything to your fuel. However, some gasolinescontain only the minimum amount of additiverequired to meet U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency regulations. To help keep fuel injectorsand intake valves clean, or if your vehicleexperiences problems due to dirty injectors orvalves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your dealer hasadditives that will help correct and preventmost deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must notbe used in vehicles that were not designedfor those fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

327

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames,and smoking materials away from fuel.Do not leave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling your vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places. Do notre-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel.Keep children away from the fuel pump;never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

328

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon aspossible. See Washing Your Vehicle on page 426.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. If the fuel cap is not properly installed,

the FUEL CAP message will appear on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) and the check enginelight will be lit on the instrument panel cluster.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202and Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 192for more information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pumpor by notifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sureto get the right type. Your dealer/retailercan get one for you. If you get the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light andmay damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 192.

329

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignitethe gasoline vapor. You can be badlyburned and your vehicle damaged ifthis occurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it isinside a vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk,pickup bed, or on any surface otherthan the ground.



• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumpinggasoline.

• Do not use a cellular phone whilepumping gasoline.

330

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle withthis symbol on it.It is located insidethe vehicle on thelower left side of theinstrument panel.

2. Release the secondary latch on the hood.It is located below the front center of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop from its retainer andput the hood prop into the slot in the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hoodprop from the slot in the hood and return the propto its retainer. Lower the hood 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm) above the vehicle and release itto latch fully. Check to make sure the hood isclosed and repeat the procedure if necessary.

331

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.9L engine (3.7L engine similar), you will see the following:

332

A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid onpage 356.

B. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 345.

C. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 338.

D. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in enginecompartment). See Power Steering Fluidon page 355.

E. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick(If Equipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic Transmission Fluid onpage 339.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 333.

G. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling Systemon page 350.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND).See Jump Starting on page 362.

I. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 333.

J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 362.

K. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid” underBrakes on page 357.

L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 433.

M. Battery. See Battery on page 361.N. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).

See Hydraulic Clutch on page 344.

Engine OilChecking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332for the location of the engine oil dipstick.1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several

minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If you donot do this, the oil dipstick might not show theactual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tip down, andcheck the level.

333

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area (L),you need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 437.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If theengine has so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatched area thatshows the proper operating range, theengine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou are through.

334

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094MYour vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. Look for and useonly an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30is best for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirementsshould have thestarburst symbolon the container.This symbol indicatesthat the oil hasbeen certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

335

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meetGM Standard GM6094M are all you need forgood performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil change

will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL message willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 202. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system might not indicate that anoil change is necessary for over a year. However,the engine oil and filter must be changed atleast once a year and at this time the system mustbe reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained peoplewho will perform this work using genuine parts andreset the system. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oillife system whenever the oil is changed.

336

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs where youchange the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL messagebeing turned on, reset the system.

To reset the Engine Oil Life system:

1. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON.

2. Press and release the stem in the lower centerof the instrument cluster until the OIL LIFEmessage is displayed.

3. Once the alternating OIL LIFE and RESETmessages appear, press and hold the stemuntil several beeps sound. This confirmsthat the oil life system has been reset.

4. Turn the key to LOCK.

If the CHANGE OIL message comes back onwhen you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elementsthat can be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stayon your skin for very long. Clean your skinand nails with soap and water, or a good handcleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothingor rags containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer’s warnings about the use anddisposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment.If you change your own oil, be sure to drain allthe oil from the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, into sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil. If you havea problem properly disposing of used oil, askyour dealer/retailer, a service station, or a localrecycling center for help.

337

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the passenger’s side ofthe vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 332 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 442 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engineoil change.

How to Inspect the EngineAir Cleaner/FilterTo inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover onand remove the cover.

2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.

3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 454to determine which filter to use.

4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover.Fasten the clips to hold the cover in place.

338

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flamesif the engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransmission FluidA good time to check your automatic transmissionfluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 444, andbe sure to use the transmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealer/retailerservice department.

339

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a falsereading on the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid could come outand fall on hot engine parts or exhaust systemparts, starting a fire. Too little fluid couldcause the transmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading if you checkyour transmission fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransmission fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures areabove 90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should beat normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),drive the vehicle in THIRD (3) until the enginetemperature gage moves and then remainssteady for 10 minutes.

A cold fluid check can be made after the vehiclehas been sitting for eight hours or more withthe engine off, but this is used only as a reference.Let the engine run at idle for five minutes ifoutside temperatures are 50°F (10°C) or more.If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), you may haveto idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level below during this cold check, you must check thefluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluidhot will give you a more accurate reading ofthe fluid level.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place theshift lever in PARK (P).

340

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutesor more.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

1. Flip the handle up and then pull out thedipstick and wipe it with a clean rag orpaper towel.

The automatictransmission dipstickhandle with this symbolon it is located in theengine compartmenton the passenger’sside of the vehicle.

See Engine Compartment Overview onpage 332 for more information on location.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and readthe lower level. The fluid level must be in theCOLD area, below the cross-hatched area, fora cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatchedarea for a hot check. Be sure to keep thedipstick pointed down to get an accuratereading.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way; thenflip the handle down to lock the dipstickin place.

341

How to Add AutomaticTransmission FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transmission fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.

Add fluid only after checking the transmissionfluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as areference. If the fluid level is low, add only enoughof the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOTarea for a hot check. It does not take much fluid,generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered byyour warranty. Always use the automatictransmission fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 452.• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as

described under “How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.

• When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way; then flip thehandle down to lock the dipstick in place.

Manual Transmission Fluid

When to CheckA good time to have it checked is when theengine oil is changed. However, the fluid in yourmanual transmission does not require changing.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be a little difficult,you may choose to have this done at yourGM dealer/retailer service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false reading.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage your transmission. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if youcheck your transmission fluid.

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,the vehicle is parked on a level place and thetransmission is cool enough for you to rest yourfingers on the transmission case.

342

Then, follow these steps:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, install the plugand be sure it is fully seated. If the fluid levelis low, add more fluid as described in thenext steps.

How to Add FluidHere is how to add fluid. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 452.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add onlyenough fluid to bring the fluid level up tothe bottom of the filler plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug isfully seated.

343

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoiris filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.

The hydraulic clutchfluid reservoir caphas this symbolon it. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 forreservoir location.

It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour clutch master cylinder reservoir and for theproper fluid. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 452.

344

How to Check and Add FluidThe proper fluid should be added if the level doesnot reach the bottom of the diaphragm when itis in place in the reservoir. See the instructionson the reservoir cap.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occursfirst, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 348.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection downto −34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection upto 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages workas they should.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin your vehicle.

345

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and the proper coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use onlythe proper mixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 452 for more information.

Checking CoolantThe coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it.

346

It is located toward the rear of the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 332 for more information on location.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenyour engine is cold, the coolant level should beat FULL COLD, or a little higher. When yourengine is warm, the level could be above theFULL COLD level.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost neverhave to add coolant at the radiator.



Never turn the radiator pressurecap — even a little — when the engineand radiator are hot.

Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but becareful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do notspill coolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to addcoolant to the radiator, see Cooling Systemon page 350.

347

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap isproperly and tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingA coolant temperature gage is on the instrumentpanel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 191.

The air conditioning might stop working if theengine is too hot. This is normal and helpscool the engine.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

348

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades”under Towing a Trailer on page 306.

If you get the overheat warning with no signof steam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL and let the engine idle.

2. Turn off the air conditioning.

3. Turn on your heater to full hot at thehighest fan speed and open the windowsas necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slowerfor about 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, andpark your vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while you are parked. Push downthe accelerator until the engine speed is abouttwice as fast as normal idle speed for at leastthree minutes while you are parked. If youstill have the warning, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but toget service help right away.

349

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood,here is what you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Engine Cooling FanC. Radiator Pressure Cap

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, you may have a leak at the pressure cap orin the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, waterpump or somewhere else in the cooling system.

350

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, start the engineagain. The engine cooling fan speed shouldincrease when idle speed is doubled by pushingthe accelerator pedal down. If it does not,your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner,at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

351

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but the coolantlevel is not at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®

engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. SeeEngine Coolant on page 345 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do notspill coolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tankis at the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.

352

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. Add the proper mixturedirectly to the radiator, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burn youbadly. They are under pressure, and if youturn the radiator pressure cap — even alittle — they can come out at high speed.Never turn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the radiator pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the cooling systemand radiator pressure cap to cool if youever have to turn the pressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. Remove the radiator pressure cap when thecooling system, including the upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure capslowly counterclockwise about one full turn.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.A hiss means there is still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the cap to remove it.

353

3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 345for more information about the propercoolant mixture.

4. Fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL COLD mark.

5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck might be lower. If the levelis lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap.

At any time during this procedure if coolant beginsto flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure to secure it tightly.

354

Engine Fan NoiseThis vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan.When the clutch is engaged, the fan spins fasterto provide more air to cool the engine. In mosteveryday driving conditions, the clutch is notengaged. This improves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailertowing and/or high outside temperatures, thefan speed increases when the clutch engages.So you may hear an increase in fan noise.This is normal and should not be mistaken asthe transmission slipping or making extra shifts.It is merely the cooling system functioningproperly. The fan will slow down when additionalcooling is not required and the clutch disengages.

You may also hear this fan noise when youstart the engine. It will go away as the fanclutch disengages.

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is located nearthe front of the enginecompartment, behindthe radiator. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leakin the system or you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

355

How to Check Power Steering Fluid1. Turn the key off and let the engine

compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstickwith a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Then remove the cap again and look atthe fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be between the ADD andFULL marks. If necessary, add only enoughfluid to bring the level up to the proper range.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 332for reservoir location.

356

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank ifit is completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 332 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking outof the brake system. If it is, you should havethe brake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

357

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when the linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If you have too much brake fluid, it canspill on the engine. The fluid will burn ifthe engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking Brake Fluid” inthis section.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhen to check the brake fluid. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 442.

Checking Brake FluidYou can check the brake fluid without takingoff the cap.

Look at the brakefluid reservoir. Thefluid level shouldbe above MIN. If it isnot, have the brakesystem checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,make sure the level is above the MIN but notover the MAX mark.

358

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 452.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap andthe area around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 426.

359

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and reardrum brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.Some driving conditions or climates can cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary tohelp prevent brake pulsation. When tires arerotated, inspect brake pads for wear and evenlytighten wheel nuts in the proper sequenceto torque specifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 437.

Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbingnoise, have the rear brake linings inspectedimmediately. Also, the rear brake drums shouldbe removed and inspected each time the tiresare removed for rotation or changing. Whenyou have the front brake pads replaced, havethe rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is arapid increase in pedal travel. This could bea sign that brake service might be required.

360

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a brake stop, the brakesadjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex.Its many parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example, whenthe brake linings wear down and you need newones put in — be sure you get new approvedreplacement parts. If you do not, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example, if someone putsin brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,the balance between the front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 332 for battery location.

Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

361

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 362 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode

or ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

362

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other. If they are,it could cause a ground connection you donot want. You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transmission in PARK (P) or amanual transmission in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfercase is not in NEUTRAL.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always turn off your radio andother accessories when jump startingyour vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories pluggedinto the cigarette lighter or the accessorypower outlets. Turn off the radio and alllamps that are not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save both batteries.And it could save the radio!

363

4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)and negative (−) terminal locations on theother vehicle. Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) and a remote negative (−) jumpstarting terminal. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 332 for more informationon the terminal locations.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People havebeen hurt doing this, and some havebeen blinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.



Be sure the batteries have enough water.You do not need to add water to theACDelco® battery (or batteries) installedin your new vehicle. But if a battery hasfiller caps, be sure the right amount offluid is there. If it is low, add water to takecare of that first. If you do not, explosivegas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

364

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here aresome basic things you should know.Positive (+) will go to positive (+) or to aremote positive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too.And do not connect the negative (−) cableto the negative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

365

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anythinguntil the next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part, or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−)cable at least 18 inches (45 cm) awayfrom the dead battery, but not near engineparts that move. The electrical connectionis just as good there, and the chanceof sparks getting back to the battery ismuch less.Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)terminal for this purpose.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

366

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable fromthe other vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

367

Rear AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check rear axlefluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle shouldbe on a level surface.

The proper level is from 0 to 3/8 inch(0 mm to 10 mm) below the bottom of thefiller plug hole, located on the rear axle.

What to UseSee Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 452 to determine which kind oflubricant to use.

Four-Wheel DriveLubricant checks in this section apply to thisvehicle. There are two additional systemsthat need lubrication.

Transfer CaseWhen to Check LubricantRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often to check the lubricant. See AdditionalRequired Services on page 444.

How to Check LubricantTo get an accurate reading, the vehicle shouldbe on a level surface.

368

A. Drain PlugB. Filler Plug

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,located on the transfer case, you’ll need to addsome lubricant. Remove the plug and add enoughlubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the fillerplug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.

What to UseRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of lubricant to use. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 452.

Front AxleWhen to Check and Change LubricantIt is not necessary to regularly check your frontaxle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or youhear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicatea problem. Have it inspected and repaired.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle shouldbe on a level surface.

369

If the level is below the bottom of the filler plughole, located on the front axle, you may needto add some lubricant.

When the differential is cold, add enough lubricantto raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below thefiller plug hole.

When the differential is at operating temperature(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the levelto the bottom of the filler plug hole.

What to UseSee Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 452 to determine what kind oflubricant to use.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs,see Replacement Bulbs on page 374.

For any bulb changing procedure not listedin this section, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others couldbe injured. Be sure to read and followthe instructions on the bulb package.

370

Headlamps

A. Low-Beam Headlamp/Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)

B. High-Beam Headlamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 331 for more information.

2. Reach in and access the bulb socketsfrom inside the engine compartment.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

4. Unplug the electrical connector from the oldbulb by releasing the clips on the bulb socket.

5. Replace with a new bulb socket.

6. Plug in the electrical connector to thenew bulb socket.

7. Reinstall the new bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly and turn it clockwiseto secure.

8. Close the hood.

371

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps (DRL)To replace one of these bulbs:1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on

page 331 for more information.

2. Reach in to access either one of the bulbsockets in the engine compartment.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove it from the lamp assembly.

4. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb torelease it from the bulb socket.

5. Push the new bulb into the socket until it clicks.

6. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assemblyand turn it clockwise to secure.

7. Close the hood.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL)To replace the CHMSL bulb:

1. Remove the two screws and lift off the lampassembly from the vehicle.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andremove it from the lamp assembly.

3. Holding the socket, pull the bulb to release itfrom the socket.


372

5. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp assemblyand turn it clockwise to secure.

6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tightenthe screws.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplampsand Back-up Lamps

A. Stoplamp/TaillampB. Turn Signal/TaillampC. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the tailgate.See Tailgate on page 110for more information.

2. Remove thetwo rear lampassemblyscrews near thetailgate latch.

3. Pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle.

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillamp assembly.

5. Holding the socket, pull the old bulb torelease it from the socket.


7. Insert the bulb socket into the taillampassembly and turn it clockwise to secure.

8. Reinstall the taillamp assembly and tightenthe screws.

9. Close the tailgate.

373

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulbsocket.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb socket out of the connector.

3. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulbsocket.

4. Push the new bulb straight in until it clicksto secure it.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thelicense plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb Number

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 912

License Plate Bulb W5W

Headlamps

High-beam 9005

Low-beam/DaytimeRunning Lamp (DRL) 9006

Parking/Front Turn Signal 3757KA

Parking Lamp (Inboard) 3157A

Stoplamp, Rear Turn Signal,Taillamp, and Back-up Lamp 3057

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

374

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 442 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For proper type andlength, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 454.

Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch thewindshield when no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touchthe windshield.

1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift thewiper arm until it locks into a verticalposition.

A. Blade AssemblyB. Arm AssemblyC. Locking Tab

D. Blade PivotE. Hook SlotF. Arm Hook

2. Press down on the blade assembly pivotlocking tab. Pull down on the blade assemblyto release it from the wiper arm hook.

3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly.The insert has two notches at one end thatare locked by bottom claws of the bladeassembly. At the notched end, pull theinsert from the blade assembly.

375

4. To install the new wiper insert, slide theinsert (D), notched end last, into the end withtwo blade claws (A). Slide the insert all theway through the blade claws at the oppositeend (B). The plastic caps (C) will be forcedoff as the insert is fully inserted.

5. Be sure that the notches are locked by thebottom claws. Make sure that all other clawsare properly locked on both sides of theinsert slots.

A. Claw in NotchB. Correct InstallationC. Incorrect Installation

6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper armhook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locksin the hook slot.

7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and bladeassembly onto the windshield.

376

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty booklet fordetails. For additional information refer to the tiremanufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tirescan cause overheating as a resultof too much friction. You could havean air-out and a serious accident.See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 293.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checkedwhen your vehicle’s tires are cold.See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 384.

• Overinflated tires are more likely tobe cut, punctured, or broken by asudden impact — such as whenyou hit a pothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.If the tire’s tread is badly worn,or if your vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

377

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded intoits sidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact sparetire sidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

Passenger Vehicle Tire Example

378

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 395.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency usewhen a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See “Compact Spare Tire” under Spare Tire onpage 420 for additional information.(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and numberof plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Compact Spare Tire Example

379

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 384.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspectratio, construction type and service description.The letter T as the first character in the tiresize means the tire is for temporary use only.

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) P-Metric Tire: The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system. The letter P as thefirst character in the tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered to standards set by theU.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70,as shown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 70 percent as high asit is wide.

380

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is usedto indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter B means belted-bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is themaximum speed a tire is certified to carry a load.Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and DefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of the tire.Air pressure is expressed in pounds per squareinch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is locatedbetween the plies and the tread. Cords may bemade from steel or other reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 384.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

381

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximumair pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded onto thesidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for atire at the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 293.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same moldings onthe other sidewall of the tire.

382

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressureas shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 384 and Loading Your Vehicleon page 293.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 391.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratingsare determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 395.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 293.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tireand Loading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 293.

383

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to your vehicle. This label showsyour vehicle’s original equipment tires and thecorrect inflation pressures for your tires when theyare cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to supportyour vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 293. Howyou load your vehicle affects vehicle handlingand ride comfort. Never load your vehiclewith more weight than it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more.Also check the tire pressure of the spare tire.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire, itshould be at 60 psi (420 kPa). See Spare Tireon page 420 for additional information.

384

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properlyinflated simply by looking at them. Radial tiresmay look properly inflated even when they areunderinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold. Cold means your vehiclehas been sitting for at least three hours or drivenno more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low, add air until youreach the recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS). This system uses radio andsensor technology to check tire pressure levels.TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tireand wheel assembly on your vehicle, exceptthe spare tire. The TPMS sensors monitor theair pressure in your vehicle’s tires and transmitthe tire pressure readings to a receiver locatedin the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning light located in the instrument panelcluster, and at the same time display the LOWTIRE warning message on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The low tire pressure warninglight and the LOW TIRE warning message appearat each ignition cycle until the tires are inflatedto the correct inflation pressure. For additionalinformation and details about the DIC operationand displays see DIC Controls and Displayson page 198 and DIC Warnings and Messageson page 202.

385

You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,that the low tire pressure warning light and theDIC LOW TIRE message may come on when thevehicle is first started, and then turn off as youstart to drive. This may be an early indicatorthat the air pressure in the tire(s) is getting lowand needs to be inflated to the proper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by thevehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If your vehiclehas tires of a different size than the size indicatedon the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with atire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) thatilluminates a low tirepressure telltale whenone or more of yourtires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tiresas soon as possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

386

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the lowtire pressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctionsmay occur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attachedto your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when theyare cold. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293,for an example of the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 384for additional information.

Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a lowtire pressure condition but it does not replacenormal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 390, When It Is Time forNew Tires on page 391, and Tires on page 377.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. Theliquid sealant can damage the tire pressuremonitor sensors.

387

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate your vehicle’s tires,the identification codes will need to be matchedto the new tire/wheel position. The sensorsare matched to the tire/wheel positions in thefollowing order: driver’s side front tire, passenger’sside front tire, passenger’s side rear tire, anddriver’s side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostictool. See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’sair pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You will have one minute to match the firsttire/wheel position, and five minutes overall, tomatch all four tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger than one minute, to match the first tireand wheel, or more than five minutes to matchall four tire and wheel positions the matchingprocess stops and you will need to start over.

The TPMS sensor matching procedure isoutlined below:1. Set the parking brake.2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the

engine off.3. Turn the exterior lamp switch from AUTO

to OFF four times within three seconds.A double horn chirp will sound and the TPMSlow tire warning light starts flashing. Thedouble horn chirp and flashing TPMS warninglight indicates the TPMS matching processhas started. The TPMS warning light shouldcontinue flashing throughout the matchingprocedure. The LOW TIRE message displayson the Driver Information Center (DIC).

4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap

stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasingor decreasing the tire’s air pressure for10 seconds, then stop and listen for a singlehorn chirp. The single horn chirp should soundwithin 15 seconds, confirming that the sensoridentification code has been matched to thistire and wheel position. If you do not hear theconfirming single horn chirp, turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK and start over beginning with

388

Step 2. To let air-pressure out of a tire youcan use the pointed end of the valve cap,a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

6. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,and repeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver side rear tire, check to see if the TPMSlow tire warning light and the DIC LOW TIREmessages have turned off. If yes, the TPMSsensors have been relearned. Turn the ignitionswitch to LOCK.If the low tire warning light and the DIC SERVTPM messages are on after completing Step 5for the driver side rear tire, the sensor relearnprocess has not been successful. Turn theignition switch to LOCK and repeat thematching process beginning with Step 2.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the Tire andLoading Information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) and Industryand Science CanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system byother than an authorized service facility couldvoid authorization to use this equipment.

389

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 391and Wheel Replacement on page 396 formore information.

Make sure the spare tire is stored securely.Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire.If it moves, use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 400.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important, seeScheduled Maintenance on page 442.

When rotating your tires, always use one of thecorrect rotation patterns shown here.

If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a sparetire that does not match your vehicle’s road tiresand wheels, in size and type, do not includethe spare in the tire rotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label. For thelocation of the Tire and Loading Information labelsee Loading Your Vehicle on page 293. Makecertain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened,see “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities andSpecifications on page 437 for the proper wheelnut torque specification.

390

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 400.

Any time you rotate the vehicle’s tires the TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS) will need to bereset. The TPMS identification codes will needto be matched to the tire and wheel position.See “TPMS Sensor Identification Codes” underTire Pressure Monitor System on page 385.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.Some commercial trucktires may not havetreadwear indicators.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

391

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tiresfor your vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new,were designed to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tireswith the same TPC Spec rating. This way,your vehicle will continue to have tires thatare designed to give the same performanceand vehicle safety, during normal use, as theoriginal tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 378 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle while driving.If you mix tires of different sizes, brands,or types (radial and bias-belted tires),the vehicle may not handle properly, andyou could have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types may alsocause damage to your vehicle. Be sureto use the correct size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.


392


Your vehicle may have a compact sparetire and wheel assembly. If the vehiclehas a compact spare tire and wheel,they have the same overall diameteras your vehicle’s full-size tires andwheels. Because they were designedand developed for use on your vehicle,it is all right to drive your vehicle withthe compact spare installed properly.Compact spare tires are designed fortemporary use only. See Spare Tireon page 420.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires withthose that do not have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the same size, load range,speed rating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label and its location on your vehicle.

393

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicle performs, includingits braking, ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronicstability control, the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 392 andAccessories and Modifications on page 324for additional information.

394

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),which grades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies onlyto vehicles sold in the United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls of most passengercar tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporaryuse spare tires, tires with nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

395

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular basis. However,if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, the alignment mayneed to be checked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tiresand wheels may need to be rebalanced. See yourdealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailerif any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

396

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one it replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only with newGM original equipment parts. This way, you willbe sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 400 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use anew GM original equipment wheel.

397

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/75R15, P265/75R15, P235/75R15, or P235/50R18 sizetires, do not use tire chains. They candamage your vehicle because there is notenough clearance. Tire chains used ona vehicle without the proper amount ofclearance can cause damage to thebrakes, suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose controlof your vehicle and you or others maybe injured in a crash.



Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions. To helpavoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,readjust, or remove the device if it iscontacting your vehicle. Do not spin thevehicle’s wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the rear tires.

Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size otherthan P225/75R15, P265/75R15, P235/75R15 orP235/50R18 use tire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use chains that are theproper size for your tires. Install them on thetires of the rear axle. Do not use chains on thetires of the front axle. Tighten them as tightlyas possible with the ends securely fastened.

398

Drive slowly and follow the chainmanufacturer’s instructions. If you can hearthe chains contacting your vehicle, stopand retighten them. If the contact continues,slow down until it stops. Driving too fast orspinning the wheels with chains on willdamage your vehicle.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But if you should everhave a blowout, here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheelfirmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane.A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

Get the vehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how touse the jacking equipment to change a flattire safely.

399

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers. See Hazard WarningFlashers on page 162 for more information.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire.To help prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,be sure the transfer case is in a drivegear – not in NEUTRAL.

4. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

5. Do not allow passengers to remainin the vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, put blocks at the front andrear of the tire farthest away from theone being changed. That would be thetire on the other side, at the oppositeend of the vehicle.

400

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof the wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe tools you will need are located under thepassenger’s seat.

For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocksare located under the driver’s side rear seat.

Crew Cab

401

For regular andextended cab vehicles,the jack and wheelblocks are locatedunder the cover at thecenter of the vehiclebehind the front seats.

To access the tools:

1. Move the seatsforward to accessthe cover.

2. Turn the wing nut on the covercounterclockwise to remove it.For crew cab models, reach under the rearseat to access the jack and wheel blocks.To reinstall the jack and wheel block assemblyin the mounting bracket, insert the tabs intothe jack base by pushing the blocks up intothe assembly. The outer hole in the jack basealigns with the tab on the bracket. Whenreinstalling, make sure the jack is secure, butdo not overtighten the jack in the bracket.

3. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer by turning the wing nutcounterclockwise.

4. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rearof the tire farthest away from the one beingchanged. That would be the tire on theother side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.

5. Locate the wing nut used to retain the storagebag and tools which is under the frontpassenger’s seat. Remove it by turning thewing nut counterclockwise.

You will use the jack handle extensions and thewheel wrench to remove the underbody-mountedspare tire.

Regular/Extended Cab

Extended/Regular Cab

402

A. Jack HandleExtensions

B. Jack

C. Extension ToolD. Wheel WrenchE. Wheel Blocks

1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D) and thejack handle extensions (A).

2. Insert the hoist end (chiseled end) of theextension tool (C) through the hole in therear bumper and into the funnel-shaped guide.The chiseled end of the extension is usedto lower the spare tire.

3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwiseto lower the spare tire to the ground. Continueto turn the wheel wrench until the spare tirecan be pulled out from under the vehicle.If the spare tire does not lower to the ground,the secondary latch is engaged causingthe tire not to lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 412.

403

4. Tilt the retainerwhen the tire hasbeen lowered,and slide it up thecable so it canbe pulled up throughthe wheel opening.

5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireUse the following pictures and instructions as aguide in removing the flat tire and raising the vehicle.

The tools you will be using include the jack (A),the wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C),the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheelwrench (E).

404

1. Remove the center cap by placing the chiselend of the wheel wrench (E) into one of theslots on the wheel and gently prying thecap out.If your vehicle has the Xtreme package,remove each wheel nut cap with the wheelwrench and remove the center cap by hand.

2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts by turning it counterclockwise. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

405

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raisingthe vehicle.

3. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle asshown for the front or rear locations.

Front Position

406

If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle,position the jack to the rear of the front tirein the pocket off of the frame.

If the flat tire is on the rear, position thejack under the rear axle and get as closeas possible to the shock absorber.

4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so thatthe rear axle is resting securely between thegrooves that are on the jack head.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thevehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough room for the sparetire to fit under the wheel well.

Front Position Rear Position

407

6. Remove all thewheel nuts and takeoff the flat tire. {CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time.The wheel could come off and cause anaccident. When changing a wheel, removeany rust or dirt from the places wherethe wheel attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, a cloth or a paper towel canbe used to do this; but be sure to use ascraper or wire brush later, if needed,to get all the rust or dirt off.

408

7. Remove anyrust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts,mounting surfacesand spare wheel.

8. Install the spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose.The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causinga serious accident.

9. Put the wheel nutsback on with therounded end ofthe nuts toward thewheel. Tighten eachwheel nut by hand.Then use the wheelwrench to tightenthe nuts until thewheel is heldagainst the hub.

409

10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.

Front Position Rear Position

410

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 437for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 437for the wheel nut torque specification.

11. Tighten thewheel nuts firmlyin a crisscrosssequence asshown by turningthe wheel wrenchclockwise.

When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire,you must also reinstall the center cap. Placethe cap on the wheel and tap it into place untilit seats flush with the wheel. The cap only goeson one way. Be sure to line up the tab on thecenter cap with the indentation on the wheel.

For the Xtreme, tighten each nut cap by hand,then tighten an additional one quarter of a turnwith the wheel wrench.

411

Secondary Latch SystemYour vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoistassembly that has a secondary latch system.It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenlyfalling off your vehicle. For the secondary latchto work, the spare must be installed with the valvestem pointing down. See Storing a Flat or SpareTire and Tools on page 416.

{CAUTION:

Before beginning this procedure read allthe instructions. Failure to read and followthe instructions could damage the hoistassembly and you and others could gethurt. Read and follow the instructionslisted next.

To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:

1. Check under thevehicle to seeif the cable endfitting is visible.

2. If the cable end fitting is not visible, proceedto Step 6.If it is visible, first try to tighten the cableby turning the wheel wrench clockwise untilyou hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten the cable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheelwrench counterclockwise three or four turns.

412

4. Repeat this procedure at least two times.If the spare tire lowers to the ground,continue with Step 5 under Removing theSpare Tire and Tools on page 401.

5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise untilapproximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cableis exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortestends, with the backs facing each other.

7. Place the bottomedge of thejack (A) on thewheel blocks (B),separating themso that the jack isbalanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheelwrench to the jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicle towards thefront of the rear bumper. Position the centerlift point of the jack under the wheel.

9. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise thejack until it lifts the tire.

10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stopsmoving upward and is held firmly in place,the secondary latch has released, and thetire is balancing on the jack.

413

11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoistend of the extension through the hole in therear bumper.Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwiseone turn or until the wheel retainer assemblyis disengaged.

12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack.Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keep lowering the jackuntil the spare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

{CAUTION:

Someone standing too close during theprocedure could be injured by the jack.If the spare tire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one is behindyou or on either side of you as you pullthe jack out from the under spare.

414

13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack andcarefully remove the jack. Use one hand topush against the spare while firmly pulling thejack out from under the spare tire with theother hand.If the spare tire is hanging from the cable,insert the hoist end of the extension intothe hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turnthe wheel wrench counterclockwise tolower the spare the rest of the way.

14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cableand pull it through the wheel opening.Pull the tire out from under the vehicle.

15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turnthe wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable.Have the hoist assembly inspected as soonas you can. You will not be able to storea spare or flat tire using the hoist assemblyuntil it has been replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire, see Removingthe Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire onpage 404.

415

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time or with the valve stem pointingup may damage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stem pointing downand have the wheel/tire repaired as soonas possible.

Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in thespare tire carrier.

1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of thevehicle with the valve stem pointed down.

2. Tilt the retainer downward and through thewheel opening. Make sure the retainer isfully seated across the underside of the wheel.

416

3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensionstogether as shown.

4. Insert the hoist end of the extension throughthe hole in the rear bumper and into thefunnel-shaped guide.

5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raisethe tire part way up. Make sure the retaineris seated in the wheel opening and thevalve stem is pointed down.

6. Raise the tire fully against the undersideof the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten the cable.

417

7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire.If the tire moves, check to make sure thetire valve stem is pointing down, then usethe wheel wrench to loosen and thentighten the cable.

To store the tools, do the following:

1. Return the wheel wrench, jack extensionsand the storage bag to the locationsdescribed under Removing the SpareTire and Tools on page 401.

2. Install the wheel blocks first.Then install the jack.

3. Secure the items in the vehicle asshown next.

418

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Wing Nut

A. JackB. Wheel BlocksC. Wing Nut

Crew Cab

Regular/Extended Cab

419

Spare Tire

Compact Spare TireYour vehicle may have a compact spare tire.Although the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airover time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand the compact spare tire is installed onyour vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel driveuntil you can have your flat tire repaired and/orreplaced. You could damage your vehicle,and the repair costs would not be coveredby your warranty. Never use four-wheel drivewhen the compact spare tire is installedon your vehicle.

After installing the compact spare on yourvehicle, you should stop as soon as possibleand make sure your vehicle’s spare tire iscorrectly inflated. The compact spare is made toperform well at speeds up to 62 mph (100 km/h)for distances up to 500 miles (804 km).

For heavy payloads or towing, and for low tractionor four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or replacethe full-size tire. Of course, it is best to replaceyour vehicle’s spare with a full-size tire as soonas you can. The spare tire will last longer and bein good shape in case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on your compact spare.

420

Full-Size Spare TireYour vehicle may have a full-size spare tire,which, when new, was fully inflated. A sparetire may lose air over time, so check its inflationpressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 384 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 293 for information regarding proper tireinflation and loading your vehicle. For instructionon how to remove, install, or store a spare tire,see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing theSpare Tire on page 404 and Storing a Flator Spare Tire and Tools on page 416.

Your vehicle may have a different size spare tirethan the road tires originally installed on yourvehicle. This spare was developed for use onyour vehicle, so it is alright to drive on it. If yourvehicle has four-wheel drive and the differentsize spare tire is installed, keep the vehiclein two-wheel drive.

Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel driveand the different size spare tire is installedon your vehicle, do not drive in four-wheeldrive until you can have your flat tire repairedand/or replaced. You could damage yourvehicle, and the repair costs would notbe covered by your warranty. Never usefour-wheel drive when the different sizespare tire is installed on your vehicle.

After installing the spare tire on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare is correctly inflated. The sparetire is made to perform well at speeds up to62 mph (100 km/h) for distances up to 500 miles(804 km). For heavy payloads or towing, andfor low traction or four-wheel-drive conditions,repair or replace the full-size tire. Have thedamaged or flat road tire repaired or replacedas soon as you can and installed back ontoyour vehicle. This way, the spare tire will beavailable in case you need it again.

Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes,because they will not fit. Keep your spare tireand its wheel together.

421

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremesof heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they werenot intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer/retailerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

422

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp objectto remove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressivelywith a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressurecan damage your interior and does not improvethe effectiveness of soil removal.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundrydetergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leave aresidue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholsterywhile cleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

423

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area untilthe cleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaningis necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used. Allow the leather todry naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Neveruse steam to clean leather. Never use spot liftersor spot removers on leather. Many commercialleather cleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather may permanentlychange the appearance and feel of your leatherand are not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

424

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleanersand coatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your interior andare not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase glosson your instrument panel. The increase ingloss may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to seethrough the windshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent applicationmay be required. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 452.

425

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays ofthe sun. Use a car washing soap. Do notuse strong soaps or chemical detergents.Be sure to rinse the vehicle well, removing allsoap residue completely. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials onpage 431. Do not use cleaning agents that arepetroleum based, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning agents should be flushed promptlyand not allowed to dry on the surface, or theycould stain. Avoid using hard brushes duringcleaning. It may damage your vehicle’s finish.Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois oran all-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressurewashes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to thesurface of the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft clothand a car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 426.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of yourvehicle by hand may be necessary to removeresidue from the paint finish. You can get approvedcleaning products from your dealer/retailer. SeeVehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 431.

If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish, the clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made fora basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

426

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrialchimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish ifthey remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe for painted surfacesto remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. You can help tokeep the paint finish looking new by keeping yourvehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright Metal PartsBright metal parts should be cleaned regularlyto keep their luster. Washing with water is allthat is usually needed. However, you may usechrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoiddamaging protective trim, never use auto orchrome polish, steam or caustic soap to cleanaluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,is recommended for all bright metal parts.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glasscleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free clothor paper towel soaked with windshield washerfluid or a mild detergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning the blades. Bugs, roadgrime, sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiper streaking. Replacethe wiper blades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

427

Aluminum or Chrome-PlatedWheels and TrimYour vehicle may have either aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trimmay be damaged if you do not wash yourvehicle after driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodiumchloride. These chlorides are used on roadsfor conditions such as ice and dust. Alwayswash your vehicle’s chrome with soapand water after exposure.

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because you could damagethe surface. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, andbuff off immediately after application.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle throughan automatic car wash that has siliconecarbide tire cleaning brushes, you coulddamage the aluminum or chrome-platedwheels. The repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Never drive a vehicle equippedwith aluminum or chrome-plated wheelsthrough an automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaning brushes.

428

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheetmetal repair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material toparts repaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratchesin the finish should be repaired right away.Bare metal will corrode quickly and maydevelop into major repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repairedwith touch-up materials available from yourdealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damagecan be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’sbody and paint shop.

429

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removaland dust control can collect on the underbody.If these are not removed, corrosion and rust candevelop on the underbody parts such as fuellines, frame, floor pan, and exhaust systemeven though they have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materialsfrom the underbody with plain water. Cleanany areas where mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of the frameshould be loosened before being flushed.Your dealer/retailer or an underbody carwashing system can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this,we will repair, at no charge to the owner, thesurfaces of new vehicles damaged by this falloutcondition within 12 months or 12,000 miles(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.

430

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

431

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You cansee it if you look through the windshield fromoutside your vehicle. The VIN also appears onthe Certification/Tire and Service Parts labelsand the certificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)• Model designation• Paint information• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

Electrical SystemAdd-On Electrical EquipmentNotice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment can damage yourvehicle and the damage would not be coveredby your warranty. Some add-on electricalequipment can keep other components fromworking as they should.Your vehicle has an air bag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 94.

432

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fusesand circuit breakers. This greatly reducesthe chance of fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace thefuse. Be sure you replace a bad fuse with anew one of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on the road and do nothave a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick some feature of yourvehicle that you can get along without — likethe radio or cigarette lighter — and use its fuse,if it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soonas you can.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The engine compartment fuse block is locatedon the driver’s side of the engine compartment.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 332for more information on location.

To remove the cover, push in on the tab on theend of the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover,line up the tab and push down on the coveruntil the tab clicks into place.

433

Fuses UsageDRL Daylight Running LampsAUX PWR 1 Accessory Power 1STOP Brake Switch, StoplampsBLWR Climate Control FanS/ROOF Sunroof (If Equipped)

Fuses Usage

A/C Air Conditioning Control Head,Power Seats

PWR/SEAT Power Seat Circuit Breaker(If Equipped)

RT HDLP Passenger’s Side Headlamp

434

Fuses UsageLT HDLP Driver’s Side HeadlampAUX PWR 2 Accessory Power 2FOG/LAMP Fog Lamps (If Equipped)A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorWSW Wiper/Washer SwitchRVC Regulated Voltage ControlPWR/WNDW Power Windows (If Equipped)FUEL/PUMP Fuel PumpSTRTR Starter Solenoid RelayWPR Wiper

ABS 2 Anti-lock Brake System 2(ABS Pump)

DR/LCK Power Door Locks (If Equipped)ETC Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

02 SNSR Oxygen Sensors, Air InjectionReactor (AIR) Relay

CRUISE

Cruise Control Switch,Inside Rearview Mirror,Transfer Case Control Module,Brake Switch, Clutch Disable

HTD/SEAT Heated Seat (If Equipped)

AIRBAGSupplemental InflatableRestraint System, Sensingand Diagnostic Module

Fuses Usage

ABSAnti-lock Brake System (ABS),ABS module, Four-Wheel Drive,Gravity Sensor

BCK/UP Back-up LightsFRT/AXLE Front Axle ActuatorTRN/HAZRDREAR Rear Turn/Hazard Lights

ERLSMass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor,Can Purge Solenoid, Air InjectionReactor (AIR) Relay

PCMI Powertrain Control Module (PCM)TRANS Transmission Solenoid

IGN

Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch,Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,Ignition Coils 1-5, Air ConditioningRelay

INJ Injectors

ABS 1 Anti-lock Brake System 1(ABS Logic)

FRT PRKLAMP

Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver andPassenger’s Side Power WindowSwitches Lighting

REAR PRKLAMP

Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger’sSide Taillamp, License Plate Lamps

435

Fuses Usage

REAR PRKLAMP2

Driver’s Side Rear Taillamp,Passenger Side Airbag IndicatorLighting, Instrument Panel DimmingPower (2WD/4WD switch lighting)

CLSTR ClusterTRN/HAZRDFRT

Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo Lamps/Mirrors

TCCM Transfer Case Control ModuleHORN HornTBC Truck Body ControllerIGN TRNSD Ignition TransducersRDO RadioONSTAR OnStar®

CNSTR VENT Fuel Canister Vent SolenoidPCM B Powertrain Control Module (PCM) B

Relays UsageDRL Daylight Running LampsBEAM SEL Beam Selection

IGN 3 HVACIgnition 3, Climate Control,Climate Control Head Fuse,Power Seat Fuse

RAP

Retained Accessory Power(Power Window Fuse,Wiper/Washer Switch Fuse),Sunroof Fuse

Relays Usage

PRK/LAMP Front Parking Lamp Fuse,Rear Parking Lamps

HDLP HeadlampsFOG/LAMP Fog Lamps (If Equipped)FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump FuseA/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor

RUN/CRNK

Run/Crank, Airbag System Fuse,Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse,Front Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse,Transmission Fuse, ERLS

PWR/TRN Powertrain, Electronic ThrottleControl Fuse, Oxygen Sensor Fuse

HORN HornWPR 2 Wiper 2 (High/Low)WPR Wipers (On/Off)STRTR Starter Relay (PCM Relay)

Miscellaneous UsageWPR Diode — WiperA/C CLTCH Diode — Air Conditioning, ClutchMEGA FUSE Mega Fuse

436

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 452 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerantcharge amount, see the refrigerant

caution label located under the hood.See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

2.9L Engine 10.4 qt 9.8 L

3.7L Engine 10.6 qt 10.0 L

Engine Oil with Filter



Fuel Tank 19.5 gal 76 L

437

Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)

Application

Capacities

English Metric

Transmission (Drain and Refill)

Automatic 5.0 qt 4.7 L

Manual 2.3 qt 2.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended inthis manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsType VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.9L 9 AutomaticManual 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

3.7L E Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm)

438

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 440Introduction ............................................... 440Maintenance Requirements ........................ 440Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 440Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 440Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 442Additional Required Services ..................... 444Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 446

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 447At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 448At Least Once a Month ............................. 448At Least Once a Year ............................... 449Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 452Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 454Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 455Maintenance Record .................................. 456

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

439

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsNotice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.

440

So please read the following and note how youdrive. If you have any questions on how tokeep your vehicle in good condition, see yourGM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 293.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaceswithin legal driving limits.

• are driven off-road in the recommendedmanner. See Off-Road Driving on page 260.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 326.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 442 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 444and Maintenance Footnotes on page 446 forfurther information.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 325.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealerfor your service needs, you will know thatGM-trained and supported service technicianswill perform the work using genuine GM parts.

441

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 476.

Owner Checks and Services on page 447 tellsyou what should be checked, when to check it,and what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 452 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 454.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend theuse of genuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL message comes on, itmeans that service is required for your vehicle.See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 202.Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the engine oil life system may not indicatethat vehicle service is necessary for over a year.However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this timethe system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer hastrained service technicians who will perform thiswork using genuine parts and reset the system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life Systemon page 336 for information on the Engine OilLife System and resetting the system.

442

When the CHANGE OIL message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever themessage comes on 10 months or more sincethe last service or if the message has notcome on at all for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 333. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 336. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 338. See footnote (j). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspectionand Rotation on page 390 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Oncea Month on page 448.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

443

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

Check transmission and transfer case fluid levels and add fluid as needed. •

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles(kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for looseor damaged components. • • • • • •

444

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Replace engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filteron page 338.

• • •

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter (severe service).See footnote (h).

• • •

Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs.An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first).An Emission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (k).

•

445

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect drum brakelinings/shoes for wear or cracks. Inspect otherbrake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parkingbrake adjustment.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspensionand steering system for damaged, loose, ormissing parts or signs of wear. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually checkconstant velocity joints, rubber boots, and axleseals for leaks.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replace wiper bladesthat are worn or damaged. See WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 375 andWindshield and Wiper Blades on page 427 formore information.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light andall your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body doorand fuel door hinges, latches and locks (includingglove box and console doors), hood latchassembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,release pawl, and any moving seat hardware.

446

Lubricate hood safety lever pivot and prop rodpivot and tailgate latch bolt, handle assembly pivotpoints, and hinges. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid andfilter if the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police,

or delivery service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer/retailer perform this service. SeeEngine Coolant on page 345 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test thecooling system and pressure cap.

(j) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. YourGM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you withthese checks and services.Be sure any necessary repairs are completedat once. Whenever any fluids or lubricantsare added to your vehicle, make sure they arethe proper ones, as shown in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 452.

447

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhoodchecks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 333 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engineoil regularly and keep it at the properlevel. Failure to keep the engine oil atthe proper level can cause damage to theengine not covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.See Engine Coolant on page 345 forfurther details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir andadd the proper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 384. Check to make surethe spare tire is stored securely. See Changinga Flat Tire on page 400.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil LifeSystem service notification. Check the tires forwear and, if necessary, rotate the tires. SeeTire Inspection and Rotation on page 390.

448

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 133.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal downhalfway, and try to start the engine. The vehicleshould start only when the clutch pedal ispushed down all the way to the floor. If thevehicle starts when the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

449

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 133.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON, butdo not start the engine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move the shift lever out ofPARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift levermoves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer for service.

Ignition Transmission Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transmission, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P). The ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK.

• With a manual transmission, the ignition keyshould come out only in LOCK.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

450

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flushany corrosive materials from the underbody.Take care to clean thoroughly any areas wheremud and other debris can collect.

451

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 333.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolanton page 345.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Parking BrakeCable Guides

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,in Canada 89021807).

HydraulicClutch System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,in Canada 10953517) or equivalentDOT-3 brake fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ChassisLubrication

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, inCanada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Front andRear Axle

SAE 75W-90 SyntheticAxle Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,in Canada 10953455) meetingGM Specification 9986115.

452


Transfer CaseSynchromesh Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12345349,in Canada 10953465).

Rear DrivelineCenter Splineand Universal

Joints


ConstantVelocity

Universal Joint


Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, inCanada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.


Hood andDoor Hinges,Body DoorHinge Pins,

Liftgate Hingeand Linkage,

Folding Seats,and Fuel

Door Hinge


Outer TailgateHandle PivotPoints and

Hinges


WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

WeatherstripSqueaks

Synthetic Greasewith Teflon, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,in Canada 10953437).

453

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour GM dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15202408 A1624C

Engine Oil Filter

2.9L Engine 88984215 PF46

3.7L Engine 89017342 PF61

Spark Plugs 12598004 41-103

Windshield Wiper Blades

Driver’s Side — 22 inches (55 cm) 88958226 —

Passenger’s Side — 19 inches (48 cm) 88958228 —

454

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.9L and 3.7L Engines

455

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 440. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 447 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

456

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



457

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



458

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 460Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 460Online Owner Center ................................. 463Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 464Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 464GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 465Roadside Assistance Program ................... 466Courtesy Transportation ............................. 469Collision Damage Repair ........................... 471

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 475Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 475Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 475Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 476Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 476Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 478

Event Data Recorders ............................... 479OnStar ...................................................... 480Navigation System ..................................... 480Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ........ 480

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

459

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important to yourdealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales orservice departments. Sometimes, however,despite the best intentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If your concern hasnot been resolved to your satisfaction, the followingsteps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the ChevroletCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre by calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title,or the plate at the top left of the instrumentpanel and visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage(kilometers).

When contacting Chevrolet, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

460

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps 1 and 2, you should file with theBetter Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action,use of the program is free of charge and your casewill generally be heard within 40 days. If you donot agree with the decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed with any othervenue for relief available to you.

You may contact the BBB Auto Line Programusing the toll-free telephone number or writethem at the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage, and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

461

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps 1 and 2, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completed in about70 days. We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerning eligibilityin the Canadian Motor Vehicle ArbitrationPlan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you may call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or you maywrite to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

462

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for servicenationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools andforms with greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

463

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesChevrolet encourages customers to call thetoll-free number for assistance. However, if acustomer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistanceChevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

www.Chevrolet.com1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(243-8872)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

464

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma # 2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

465

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872).

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year.

As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Chevrolet RoadsideAssistance program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consentof the owner is not eligible for coverage.The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up to amaximum coverage of $100.• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the

vehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in Canada). Service to

provide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternative fuelswill not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present personal identificationbefore lock-out service is provided. In Canada,the vehicle registration is also required.Lock-out service will be covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.A remote unlock may be available if you havean active OnStar® subscription.

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadwayor Highway: Tow to the nearest dealershipfor warranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated, is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start will be covered atno charge.

466

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance will send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America,along with helpful travel information pertainingto your trip.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it is best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en route andover 250 kilometres from original point ofdeparture, you may qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicleto be repaired.

Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Theremay be times, when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance, your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

467

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate number.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. U.S. customers callChevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users,call 1-888-889-2438, Canadian customerscall 1-800-268-6800.

Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

468

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

469

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable towait, GM helps to minimize your inconvenienceby providing several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealercan offer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation orFuel ReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as “shuttleservice”, the reimbursement is limited tothe associated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition,

for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expensesmay be available. Claim amounts should reflectactual costs and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you witha courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicleis kept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

470

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to theterms and conditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and itis damaged, have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using the proper equipmentand quality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs diminish your vehicle’sresale value, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered by yourGM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any relatedfailures are not covered by that warranty.

471

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GMand may not have been tested for your vehicle.As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibitpremature durability/corrosion problems, and maynot perform properly in subsequent collisions.Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts are not coveredby that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

472

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move itby a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 466 formore information.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, knowwhere the towing service will be taking it.Get a card from the tow truck operator orwrite down the driver’s name, the service’sname, and the phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general descriptionof the damage to the other vehicle.

473

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or go tothe police department headquarters thenext day and you can get a copy of the reportfor a nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report may notbe necessary. This is especially true if thereare no injuries and both vehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facilityfor your vehicle. Whether you select adealer/retailer or a private collision repairfacility to fix the damage, make sure you arecomfortable with them. Remember, youwill have to feel comfortable with their workfor a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what workwill be performed on your vehicle. If you havea question, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facilitythat any required replacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not be coveredby your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicleis leased you may be obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts, even if yourinsurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

474

If another party’s insurance company is payingfor the repairs, you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have control of therepair and parts choices as long as cost stayswithin reasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury or death,you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

475

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainlyhope you will notify General Motors. Pleasecall the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

476

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical serviceinformation needed to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletincontains instructions to assist in the diagnosisand service of your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your General Motorsdealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US +Processing Fee

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualincludes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.


Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.


Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specify year andmodel name of the vehicle.

477

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed pricesare quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residentsare to make checks payable in U.S. funds.

Vehicle Data Recordingand PrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor the conditions forairbag deployment and deploy airbags in a crashand, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock brakingto help the driver control the vehicle. Thesemodules may store data to help your dealer/retailertechnician service your vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how you operatethe vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumptionor average speed. These modules may also retainthe owner’s personal preferences, such as radiopre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.

478

Event Data RecordersSome information about your vehicle’s performanceand how it is driven may be recorded on variousmodules if a crash occurs. Some people refer tothese modules as event data recorders (EDRs).These modules may record several seconds ofpre-crash and crash data, such as data related toengine speed, brake application, throttleposition, vehicle speed, yaw rate, steeringwheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety beltusage, airbag readiness, airbag performanceand the severity of the collision. Unlike theflight data recorders on airplanes, these modulesdo not record sounds or conversations.

To retrieve this data, special equipment andaccess to the vehicle or the module that storesthe data are required. Certain data may alsobe sent to or retrieved by OnStar® (see below).GM will not access this information or share itwith others except: with the consent of thevehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in response to an officialrequest of police or similar government office;as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, as required by law.Data that GM collects or receives may alsobe used for GM research needs or may bemade available to others for research purposes,where a need is shown and the data is not tiedto a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.

Others may be able to retrieve this data if theyhave access to the vehicle and have the specialequipment necessary to download the data.

479

OnStarIf your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribeto the OnStar® services, please refer to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 149 for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system,use of the system may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information. Please refer tothe navigation system operating manual forinformation on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles forfunctions such as tire pressure monitoringand ignition system security, as well as inconnection with conveniences such as key fobsfor remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers.RFID technology in GM vehicles does notuse or record personal information or link with anyother GM system containing personal information.

480

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 324Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 95Additives, Fuel ............................................ 326Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 432Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 338Air Conditioning ........................................... 177Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 186Readiness Light ....................................... 185

Airbag System ............................................... 77What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 86When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 83Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 80

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 95How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 85Passenger Sensing System ....................... 88Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 94What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 85

AM-FM Radio .............................................. 209Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 244

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem .................................................... 244

Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 251Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 190Appearance Care

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 428Care of Safety Belts ................................ 425Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 430Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 426Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 422Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 423Finish Care .............................................. 426Finish Damage ......................................... 429Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 425Leather .................................................... 424Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 429Tires ........................................................ 429Underbody Maintenance ........................... 430Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 431Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 426Weatherstrips ........................................... 425Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 427

Ashtray ....................................................... 177Assist Handles ............................................ 154

481

Audio System .............................................. 206AM-FM Radio .......................................... 209Care of Your CD Player ........................... 243Care of Your CDs .................................... 243Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 244Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 244Radio with CD ......................................... 212Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 222Setting the Time ...................................... 208Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 242Understanding Radio Reception ............... 242XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 244

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 172Automatic Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 339Operation ................................................. 124

BBattery ........................................................ 361

Electric Power Management ..................... 175Run-Down Protection ............................... 175

Battery Warning Light .................................. 188Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 283Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 253Parking .................................................... 133

Brakes ........................................................ 357System Warning Light .............................. 189

Braking ....................................................... 250Braking in Emergencies ............................... 253Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 118Bulb Replacement ....................................... 370

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 372

Front Turn Signal, Parking andDaytime Running Lamps ....................... 372

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 370Headlamps ............................................... 371License Plate Lamps ................................ 374Replacement Bulbs .................................. 374Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps

and Back-up Lamps .............................. 373Buying New Tires ........................................ 392

482

CCalibration .......................................... 142, 145California Fuel ............................................. 326California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 324Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ....................... 437Carbon Monoxide .............. 110, 139, 286, 306Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 425Your CD Player ........................................ 243Your CDs ................................................. 243

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 234Center Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 36Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ..... 372Chains, Tire ................................................. 398Check

Engine Light ............................................ 192Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 331Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 430Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 50Infants and Young Children ........................ 46Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children .................................................. 56

Child Restraints (cont.)Older Children ........................................... 44Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 69Securing a Child Restraint in the

Center Front Seat Position ..................... 71Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 72Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 54

Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 244Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 177Cleaning

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ........ 428Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 426Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 423Finish Care .............................................. 426Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 422Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces .......................... 425Leather .................................................... 424Tires ........................................................ 429Underbody Maintenance ........................... 430Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 426Weatherstrips ........................................... 425Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 427

483

Climate Control System ............................... 177Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 180

Clock .......................................................... 208Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 344Collision Damage Repair ............................. 471Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 40Compass ............................................ 142, 145Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 115Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 250Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 191Heater, Engine ......................................... 123

Cooling System ........................................... 350Cruise Control ............................................. 166Cruise Control Light .................................... 196Cupholder(s) ................................................ 153Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 469Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 464Customer Assistance Offices .................... 464Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 460

Customer Assistance Information (cont.)GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 465Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 476Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 475Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 475Roadside Assistance Program .................. 466Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 476

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 171Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ....... 197Defensive Driving ........................................ 246Disc, MP3 ................................................... 234Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 325Dome Lamp ................................................ 174Dome Lamp Override .................................. 175

484

DoorLocks ....................................................... 106Power Door Locks ................................... 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 108Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108Rear Doors .............................................. 109

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 26

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 198DIC Controls and Displays ....................... 198DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 202

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 276City .......................................................... 281Defensive ................................................. 246Drunken ................................................... 247Freeway ................................................... 282Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 284In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 278Off-Road .................................................. 260Recovery Hooks ....................................... 292Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 291Winter ...................................................... 286

EEDR ............................................................ 478Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 432Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 433Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 433Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 433

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 338Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 192Coolant .................................................... 345Coolant Heater ......................................... 123Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 191Drive Belt Routing .................................... 455Engine Compartment Overview ................ 332Exhaust ................................................... 139Fan Noise ................................................ 355Oil ........................................................... 333Oil Life System ........................................ 336Overheating ............................................. 348Running While Parked ............................. 140Starting .................................................... 121

485

Event Data Recorders ................................. 479Exit Lighting ................................................ 175Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 43Exterior Cargo Lamps ................................. 174Exterior Lamps ............................................ 170

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 338Finish Damage ............................................ 429Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 244Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 162Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 165Flat Tire ...................................................... 399Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 400Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 416Fluid

Automatic Transmission ............................ 339Manual Transmission ................................ 342Power Steering ........................................ 355Windshield Washer .................................. 356

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 173

Four-Wheel Drive ............................... 129, 368Front Armrest Storage Area ......................... 154Front Axle ................................................... 369Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 372Fuel ............................................................ 326

Additives .................................................. 326California Fuel .......................................... 326Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 330Filling Your Tank ...................................... 328Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 327Gage ....................................................... 197Gasoline Octane ...................................... 326Gasoline Specifications ............................ 326

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 433Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 433Windshield Wiper ..................................... 433

486

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 191Fuel ......................................................... 197Speedometer ........................................... 183Tachometer .............................................. 183

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 326Specifications ........................................... 326

Glove Box ................................................... 153GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 465

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 162Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamps .................................................. 371

Bulb Replacement .................................... 370Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 171Exterior Lamps ......................................... 170Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 165Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 370High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 165On Reminder ........................................... 171

Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ......................................................... 177Highbeam On Light ..................................... 196Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 284Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 284Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 331Release ................................................... 331

Horn ............................................................ 162How to Use This Manual ................................ 3How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 26Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 344

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 119Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 46Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 384Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 160Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 174Cluster ..................................................... 182

Interior Lamps ............................................. 174

487

JJump Starting .............................................. 362

KKeyless Entry System ................................. 102Keys ........................................................... 101

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 378Lamps

Dome ....................................................... 174Dome Lamp Override ............................... 175Exterior Cargo .......................................... 174

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 56

Latches, Seatback ......................................... 16License Plate Lamps ................................... 374Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 185Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 190Battery Warning ....................................... 188

Light (cont.)Brake System Warning ............................. 189Cruise Control .......................................... 196Daytime Running Lamps Indicator ............ 197Highbeam On .......................................... 196Malfunction Indicator ................................ 192Oil Pressure ............................................. 195Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 186Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 184Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 184Security ................................................... 196Tire Pressure ........................................... 191Up-Shift ................................................... 189

LightingExit .......................................................... 175

LightsExterior Lamps ......................................... 170Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 165High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 165Interior Lamps .......................................... 174On Reminder ........................................... 171

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ................................. 254Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 293Lockout Protection ....................................... 109

488

LocksDoor ........................................................ 106Lockout Protection ................................... 109Power Door ............................................. 107Programmable Automatic Door Locks ....... 108Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 108

Loss of Control ........................................... 259Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 10Power Controls .......................................... 11

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 444At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 448At Least Once a Month ............................ 448At Least Once a Year .............................. 449Introduction .............................................. 440Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 446Maintenance Record ................................ 456Maintenance Requirements ...................... 440Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................... 454Owner Checks and Services .................... 447Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 452

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 442Using ....................................................... 440Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 440

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 192Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10Manual Seats .................................................. 9Manual Transmission

Fluid ........................................................ 342Operation ................................................. 126

Manual Windows ......................................... 112Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 202Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview withCompass and Temperature Display ....... 145

Automatic Dimming Rearviewwith OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display ............................. 142

Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 141Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 142Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 148Outside Manual Mirrors ............................ 147Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 148

MP3 ............................................................ 234MyGMLink.com ............................................ 463

489

NNavigation System, Privacy ......................... 480New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 118Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ................................... 454

OOdometer .................................................... 183Odometer, Trip ............................................ 183Off-Road Driving .......................................... 260Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 257Oil

Engine ..................................................... 333Pressure Light .......................................... 195

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 336Older Children, Restraints ............................. 44Online Owner Center ................................... 463OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 480OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 149Other Warning Devices ................................ 162Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 180

OutletsAccessory Power ..................................... 176

OutsideConvex Mirror .......................................... 148Manual Mirrors ......................................... 147Power Mirrors .......................................... 148

Owner Checks and Services ....................... 447Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 429Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 135Shifting Out of ......................................... 137

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 133Over Things That Burn ............................ 138

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 137Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 186Passenger Sensing System ........................... 88Passing ....................................................... 257

490

Passlock® .................................................... 117Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .............. 299Power

Door Locks .............................................. 107Lumbar Controls ........................................ 11Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 121Seat .......................................................... 10Steering Fluid .......................................... 355Windows .................................................. 113

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 43Privacy ........................................................ 478

Event Data Recorders .............................. 479Navigation System ................................... 480OnStar ..................................................... 480Radio Frequency Identification .................. 480

Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 108

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 25

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 348Radio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ..................................................... 480Radios ........................................................ 206

AM-FM Radio .......................................... 209Care of Your CD Player ........................... 243Care of Your CDs .................................... 243Radio with CD ......................................... 212Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 222Setting the Time ...................................... 208Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 242Understanding Reception ......................... 242

Rear Axle .................................................... 368Limited-Slip .............................................. 254

Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 108Rear Doors ................................................. 109Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 40Rear Seat Operation .............................. 17, 18Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 37Rear Storage Area ...................................... 154

491

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming withCompass and Temperature Display ............ 145

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimmingwith OnStar®, Compass andTemperature Display ................................ 142

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 142Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 141Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 452Recovery Hooks .......................................... 292Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 300Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 102Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................. 103Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 404Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 401Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 374Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 475General Motors ........................................ 476United States Government ....................... 475

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 96Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 96Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 121Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 35Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 466Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 291Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 455Running the Engine While Parked ............... 140

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 184Pretensioners ............................................. 43Reminder Light ........................................ 184

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 425Center Front Passenger Position ................ 36

492

Safety Belts (cont.)Driver Position ........................................... 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 26Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 25Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 40Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 37Right Front Passenger Position .................. 35Safety Belt Extender .................................. 43Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 35Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 20Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 34

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 442Seatback Latches .......................................... 16Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual ........................................................ 9Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10Power Lumbar ........................................... 11Power Seats .............................................. 10

Seats (cont.)Rear Seat Operation ........................... 17, 18Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12Seatback Latches ...................................... 16

Secondary Latch System ............................. 412Securing a Child Restraint

Center Front Seat Position ......................... 71Rear Seat Position ..................................... 69Right Front Seat Position ........................... 72

Security Light .............................................. 196Service ........................................................ 324

Accessories and Modifications .................. 324Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 325California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 324Doing Your Own Work ............................. 325Engine Soon Light ................................... 192Publications Ordering Information ............. 476

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 94Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 429Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 135Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 137

493

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 34Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 164Sliding Rear Windows ................................. 114Spare Tire ................................................... 420

Installing .................................................. 404Removing ................................................ 401Storing ..................................................... 416

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 437Speedometer ............................................... 183Starting Your Engine ................................... 121Steering ...................................................... 255Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 162Storage Areas

Cupholder(s) ............................................ 153Front Armrest Storage Area ...................... 154Glove Box ................................................ 153Rear Storage Area ................................... 154

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 290Sun Visors .................................................. 115Sunroof ....................................................... 156

TTachometer ................................................. 183Tailgate ....................................................... 110Taillamps

Turn Signal, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps ..................................... 373

Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 242Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 115

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 115Passlock® ................................................ 117

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 162Time, Setting ............................................... 208Tire

Pressure Light .......................................... 191Tires ........................................................... 377

Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,Cleaning ............................................... 428

Buying New Tires ..................................... 392Chains ..................................................... 398Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 400Cleaning .................................................. 429

494

Tires (cont.)Different Size ........................................... 394If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 399Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 384Inspection and Rotation ............................ 390Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 404Pressure Monitor System ......................... 385Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 404Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 401Secondary Latch System ......................... 412Spare Tire ................................................ 420Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 416Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 378Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 381Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 395Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 396Wheel Replacement ................................. 396When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 391

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 300Towing a Trailer ....................................... 306Your Vehicle ............................................. 299

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 253Limited-Slip Rear Axle .............................. 254

TrailerRecommendations .................................... 320

TransmissionFluid, Automatic ....................................... 339Fluid, Manual ........................................... 342Up-Shift Light ........................................... 189

Transmission Operation, Automatic .............. 124Transmission Operation, Manual .................. 126Trip Odometer ............................................. 183Truck-Camper Loading Information .............. 299Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 164Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 163

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 242Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 395Up-Shift Light .............................................. 189

495

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 250Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 293Parking Your ............................................ 137Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 478Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 432Service Parts Identification Label .............. 432

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 180Visors .......................................................... 115

WWarning Lights,

Gages and Indicators ............................... 181Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 202Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 162Other Warning Devices ............................ 162Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 396Different Size ........................................... 394Replacement ............................................ 396

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 54Windows ..................................................... 112

Manual ..................................................... 112Power ...................................................... 113Sliding Rear ............................................. 114

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 166Washer Fluid ........................................... 356Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 375Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 427Wiper Fuses ............................................ 433Wipers ..................................................... 165

Winter Driving ............................................. 286

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 240XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 244

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 440

496

2007 chevrolet colorado owner manual m · 2007 chevrolet colorado owner manual m 1. ... “general...

Documents